Wilmar International Limited AR 2011 PDF

Wilmar International Limited
Annual Report 2011

Contents
1 Corporate Profile
2 Chairman’s Statement
4 Global Presence
6 Financial Highlights
8 Board of Directors
14 Key Management Team
15 Corporate Information
18 Operations Review
34 Corporate Social Responsibility
42 Human Capital Management
44 Information Technology
46 Risk Management
48 Corporate Governance
57 Financial Report
corporate
Profile
Wilmar International Limited, founded in 1991 and headquartered in Singapore, is

today Asia’s leading agribusiness group. Wilmar is ranked amongst the largest listed
companies by market capitalisation on the Singapore Exchange.
Wilmar’s business activities include oil palm cultivation, oilseeds crushing, edible
oils refining, sugar milling and refining, specialty fats, oleochemicals, biodiesel and
fertilisers manufacturing and grains processing. At the core of Wilmar’s strategy is a
resilient integrated agribusiness model that encompasses the entire value chain of
the agricultural commodity processing business, from origination and processing to
branding, merchandising and distribution of a wide range of agricultural products. It has
over 300 manufacturing plants and an extensive distribution network covering China,
India, Indonesia and some 50 other countries. The Group is backed by a multinational
workforce of over 90,000 people.
Wilmar’s portfolio of high quality processed agricultural products is the preferred

choice of the food manufacturing industry, as well as the industrial and consumer food
businesses. Its consumer-packed products occupy a leading share in its targeted markets.
Through scale, integration and the logistical advantages of its business model, Wilmar
is able to extract margins at every step of the value chain, thereby reaping operational
synergies and cost efficiencies. Wilmar remains a firm advocate of sustainable growth
and is committed to its role as a responsible corporate citizen.
Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 1

Chairman’s
Statement
FY2011 IN REVIEW Also in May, we inked a Memorandum of Understanding
FY2011 presented an economic landscape of with Huntsman Corporation to build a state-of-the-art
uncertainty with the European sovereign debt natural alcohol plant at Huntsman’s chemical site in
crisis and China’s slowing growth weighing heavily Rotterdam, The Netherlands. The facility, to be owned
on business and consumer confidence. Amidst and operated by Wilmar, will strengthen our foothold
challenging conditions, the Group continued to in Europe when it commences operations in 2013.
be profitable, recording US$1.60 billion net profit in
FY2011 versus US$1.32 billion in FY2010. Excluding In November, the Group announced a partnership
non-operating items and net gains from changes with Gavilon, LLC to construct an edible oil processing,
in the fair value of biological assets, the Group’s net transloading and storage facility in Stockton, California.
profit increased 44% to US$1.52 billion in FY2011. The cooperation will allow Wilmar to leverage on Gavilon’s
Total revenue increased 47% to US$44.71 billion marketing and distribution capabilities while the facility,
versus US$30.38 billion in FY2010 on the back of to be operational by the third quarter of 2013, will reap
higher sales volume, particularly from Oilseeds & significant supply chain benefits for customers in the
Grains and Consumer Products, and contribution California and neighbouring West Coast markets.
from the new Sugar segment.
During the year, we continued our expansion in
Earnings per share grew 21% to 25.0 US cents in FY2011 oleochemicals by adding new capacities in Indonesia
as compared to 20.7 US cents in FY2010. The Group’s and China and building a new plant in India.
balance sheet remained strong, with total assets up
by 16% to US$39.64 billion while shareholders’ funds Looking ahead, the Group will continue to take
increased to US$13.37 billion. Gearing remained advantage of favourable government incentives for
healthy despite a marginal increase to 0.97x, from downstream processing by increasing its refining
0.90x in FY2010, arising from an increase in net loans capacity in Indonesia by 50%.
and borrowings.
Oilseeds & Grains
DIVIDENDS Further strengthening our position as one of the largest
The Board has recommended a final dividend of S$0.031 wheat and rice millers in China, we completed another
per share for FY2011. Including the interim dividend two flour mills and two rice mills in 2011. The Group also
of S$0.03 per share paid in September 2011, the total acquired a 20% interest in FFM Berhad which has five
dividend for FY2011 is S$0.061 per share, representing flour mills in Malaysia, one each in Vietnam and Indonesia,
a dividend payout of about 20%. and one through joint venture in Thailand. In the region,
we are expanding our flour milling capacity with the
Major business developments construction of two new mills – one through our joint
During the year, we continued to invest in our businesses venture with FFM Berhad in Ha Long City, Vietnam, and
to drive growth, through capacity expansion and new another by our subsidiary in Gresik, Indonesia.
investments in key markets.
Construction of two oilseeds crushing plants, one
Palm & Laurics each in Russia and Ukraine, commenced during the
In May, the Group announced a partnership with New year. When completed in early 2013, each plant will
Britain Palm Oil Limited (NBPOL) to form an integrated boast an estimated capacity of 1,200 MT per day.
supply chain and joint marketing arrangement for
supplying Continental Europe with fully traceable Sugar
and segregated sustainable palm oil from NBPOL’s The Group further expanded its sugar footprint with
Roundtable on Sustainable Palm Oil (RSPO) certified the acquisition of Indonesian refinery, PT Duta Sugar
plantations. The palm oil supply will be available from International in July and Proserpine Mill in Australia
Wilmar’s refinery in Brake, Germany, from mid-2012. in December. We also acquired several thousand
This collaboration ensures that our Brake refinery is hectares of land in Australia for sugar cultivation to
able to offer a wide range of products and blends better utilise our milling capacities. Moving forward,
of certified sustainable palm oil for the European we intend to expand our sugar business through
food market. acquisitions and greenfield projects.
2 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Africa improved educational facilities for more than 12,000
During the year, the Group made good progress with rural students. To date, the Group has funded more
its investments and expansion plans in Africa. Through than 14,000 cataract operations for the elderly and
our wholly-owned subsidiary Wilmar Africa Limited, donated 2,500 wheelchairs to the disabled. Since
we acquired a 77% stake in Benso Oil Palm Plantation July 2011, we have provided financial aid for over 20
Limited which is listed on the Ghana Stock Exchange. successful prosthetic operations.
Through a joint venture with PZ Cussons, we commenced
construction of a palm oil refinery in Nigeria. We have also In Singapore, Wilmar continues to advocate higher
commenced work on developing oil palm plantations education through donations and scholarships to,
in Nigeria and look forward to further expanding our as well as overseas internship programmes with
presence in Africa. In South Africa, the Group acquired the National University of Singapore, Nanyang
a 55% interest in two oilseeds crushing plants with Technological University, Singapore Management
refinery and consumer pack facilities. University, Singapore Institute of Technology and the
Lee Kuan Yew School of Public Policy.
Sustainability and CORPORATE
SOCIAL RESPONSIBILITY OUTLOOK AND PROSPECTS
Our continued commitment and efforts towards 2012 will be an exciting year as we continue to
sustainable palm oil were suitably rewarded in 2011 explore joint ventures and closer collaborations with
with all of our mills and estates in Malaysia attaining various parties, acquisitions, expansion of existing
the RSPO certification. The Group’s production of capacities and venturing into new countries. With
certified sustainable palm oil from Indonesia and Wilmar’s healthy balance sheet, improved range of
Malaysia increased to about 520,000 tonnes per downstream product offerings, strong infrastructure
annum in 2011. in Asian countries, we are well-positioned to capture
emerging markets’ growth as well as other agri-related
Wilmar has always recognised the impact oil palm expansion opportunities which might arise.
plantations have on biodiversity. In this regard, several
initiatives were taken and accomplished during the year ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
to mitigate our footprint. These included a tripartite On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank Mr Chua
Memorandum of Understanding (MoU) with the Phuay Hee who retired from the Board and Group on
Borneo Orangutan Survival Foundation (BOSF) and 31 December 2011, for his many years of service and
the Governor of Central Kalimantan, Indonesia on contributions.
the conservation of orang utans and their habitat; a
two-year Biodiversity and Agricultural Commodities I would also like to convey our appreciation for the
Programme with the Zoological Society of London; continued support from our employees, customers,
and an Orang Utan and Nature Conservation Education business partners and bankers.
Programme in Indonesia. The Group also aims to
develop Best Management Practices that can be Last but not least, I wish to thank our shareholders
applied at a large landscape level with adjacent oil for their strong support and confidence in the Group.
palm plantations.
The Group continues to support education and Kuok Khoon Hong

healthcare for the needy. At the end of 2011, we Chairman & Chief Executive Officer
have established a total of 25 schools in China and 20 March 2012

global
Presence
Russia
Netherlands
Germany
Ukraine
Italy
Spain
United China
States of Japan
America
Bangladesh
India
• Over 300 manufacturing Ivory Coast Nigeria Vietnam Philippines

Ghana
plants across the world. Kenya
Sri Lanka Malaysia
Uganda Singapore
• Extensive distribution Tanzania Indonesia
network covering China,

India, Indonesia and Brazil Mozambique
South
some 50 other countries. Africa
Australia
• Multinational workforce New Zealand
of over 90,000 people.
4 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 5
Financial
highlights
FY2011 FY2010 FY2009 FY2008 FY2007
INCOME STATEMENT (US$ million)
Revenue 44,710 30,378 23,885 29,145 16,466
EBITDA 2,860 2,033 2,590 2,230 1,119
Profit before tax 2,079 1,644 2,294 1,789 830
Net profit 1,601 1,324 1,882 1,531 580
Earnings per share – fully diluted (US cents) 25.0 20.7 27.4 23.7 12.8
Dividend per share (Singapore cents) 6.1 5.5 8.0 7.3 2.6
CASH FLOW (US$ million)

Cash flows from operating activities 1,948 (2,319) (520) 3,231 (1,025)
Capital expenditure 1,554 1,064 1,063 1,107 610
Investment in subsidiaries and associates 356 1,679 70 248 (95)
BALANCE SHEET (US$ million)

Shareholders’ funds 13,370 11,856 10,931 9,606 7,845
Total assets 39,640 33,969 23,449 17,869 15,507
Total liabilities 25,391 21,412 12,037 7,894 7,326
Net loans and borrowings 12,991 10,637 4,445 2,390 4,060
Net gearing (x) 0.97 0.90 0.41 0.25 0.52

Net asset value per share (US cents) 208.9 185.3 171.1 150.4 122.9
Net tangible assets per share (US cents) 140.0 116.5 108.0 88.7 61.3
PROFIT BEFORE TAX BY BUSINESS SEGMENT
3%
10%
13% 2%
7% 30%
40%
FY2010 FY2011
26%
25%
22%
10% 8% 4%
Merchandising & Processing Merchandising & Processing Consumer Products Sugar Associates
– Palm & Laurics – Oilseeds & Grains Plantations & Palm Oil Mills Others
Notes:
(1) FY2007 – Net cash inflow from investment in subsidiaries and associates arose from the KG Acquisition which refers to the Kuok Group's palm plantation, edible oils, grains and related
businesses comprising Kuok Oils & Grains Pte Ltd, PGEO Group Sdn Bhd and PPB Oil Palms Berhad.
(2) Segmental breakdown calculation excludes unallocated expenses and gains from biological assets revaluation.

Revenue Net profit earnings per share
(US$ million) (US$ million) (US cents)
45000 44,710 2000 1,882 30
27.4
40000 1,601 25.0
1,531 25
35000 23.7
1500 20.7
29,145 30,378 1,324
30000 20
25000 23,885
1000 15
20000 12.8
16,466
15000 580 10
10000 500
5
5000
0 0 0
2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011
Return on average assets Return on average Equity

(%) (%)
12 25
10 9.5 20 18.3
9.3 17.5
8
15 13.3
6.0 12.7
6 11.6
5.1
4.6
10
4
5
2
0 0
2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011

Board of
directors
Kuok Khoon Hong MARTUA SITORUS TEO KIM YONG

Chairman and Executive Director and Executive Director
Chief Executive Officer Chief Operating Officer
KUOK KHOON CHEN KUOK KHOON EAN JOHN DANIEL RICE

Non-Executive Director Non-Executive Director Non-Executive Director

YEO TENG YANG LEONG HORN KEE
Lead Independent Director Independent Director
TAY KAH CHYE KWAH THIAM HOCK

Independent Director Independent Director

Board of directors
continued
KUOK KHOON HONG KUOK KHOON CHEN

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Non-Executive Director
Mr Kuok Khoon Hong, 62, is the Chairman and Chief Executive Mr Kuok Khoon Chen, 57, has been a senior executive of the Kuok
Officer of the Group. He is overall in charge of the management of Group since 1978. He is currently the Deputy Chairman of Kerry
the Group with a particular focus on new business developments. Group Limited and the Chairman and Managing Director of Kerry
He has extensive experience in the industry and has been involved Holdings Limited. He is also the Chairman of Kuok Brothers Sdn
in the grains, edible oils and oilseeds businesses since 1973. Mr Berhad and a director of a number of Kuok Group companies.
Kuok has completed many projects involving the establishment of He is the Chairman of Kerry Properties Limited which is listed
oil palm plantations in Asia and the processing of grains, edible oils on the Hong Kong Stock Exchange, and an executive director of
and oilseeds. He has held several key executive positions in various China World Trade Center Company Limited which is listed on
companies, including General Manager of Federal Flour Mills Bhd the Shanghai Stock Exchange. Mr Kuok holds a Bachelor’s degree
from 1986 to 1991 and Managing Director of Kuok Oils & Grains Pte in Economics from Monash University in Australia. Mr Kuok was
Ltd from 1989 to 1991. Mr Kuok graduated from the then University appointed on 8 February 2010 and was re-elected on 28 April 2010.
of Singapore with a Bachelor of Business Administration degree. Mr
Kuok was appointed on 24 March 2006 and was last re-elected on
29 April 2009. KUOK KHOON EAN
Non-Executive Director
Mr Kuok Khoon Ean, 56, is a director of Kuok (Singapore) Limited,
MARTUA SITORUS Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad, Kerry Group Limited and Kerry Holdings
Executive Director and Chief Operating Officer Limited. He is the Executive Chairman of Shangri-La Asia Limited, a
Mr Martua Sitorus, 52, is the Chief Operating Officer of the Group. He non-executive director of SCMP Group Limited and also an independent
is in charge of the plantation, manufacturing, palm and bio-diesel non-executive director of The Bank of East Asia, Limited, all of which
trading operations of the Group. Mr Sitorus has been instrumental are listed companies in Hong Kong. He is a director of Shangri-La
in the development of the Group’s business operations in Indonesia. Hotel Public Co. Ltd. and The Post Publishing Public Co. Ltd., which
He holds a degree in economics from HKBP Nomensen University are both listed on the Thai Stock Exchange. He has served on various
in Medan, Indonesia. Mr Sitorus was appointed on 14 July 2006 and statutory bodies in Singapore, namely the Sentosa Development
was last re-elected on 28 April 2011. Corporation from 1993 to 2000, the Singapore Trade Development
Board from 1995 to 1998 and the Singapore Tourism Board from
2000 to 2001. He has been on the Board of Trustees of the Singapore
TEO KIM YONG Management University since 2000 - an appointment that has been
Executive Director extended until January 2013. Mr Kuok holds a Bachelor of Economics
Mr Teo Kim Yong, 58, is in charge of commercial activities and the degree from Nottingham University, UK. Mr Kuok was appointed on
Group’s merchandising of palm and lauric oils. Mr Teo joined the 2 July 2007 and was re-elected on 28 April 2010.
Group in 1992 and has extensive experience in the marketing and
merchandising of edible oil products. Mr Teo graduated from the then
University of Singapore with a Bachelor of Business Administration JOHN DANIEL RICE
degree. Mr Teo was appointed on 14 July 2006 and was last re-elected Non-Executive Director
on 28 April 2011. Mr John Daniel Rice, 58, is Vice Chairman of Archer Daniels Midland
Company (ADM), a company listed on the New York Stock Exchange
and serves on the company’s Strategic Planning Committee. Mr
Rice joined ADM in 1976 and has more than 35 years of agribusiness
experience. Within ADM, he has held various senior management
positions within the processing division, including President, North
American Oilseeds and Food Oils; Senior Vice President, Global Corn
Processing, BioProducts and Food; Executive Vice President, Global
Marketing and Risk Management; and Executive Vice President,
Commercial and Production. He was promoted to Vice Chairman
of ADM in October 2010. He holds a Bachelor of Arts degree in
Accounting from the University of Saint Thomas, USA. Mr Rice was
appointed on 1 January 2008 and was re-elected on 28 April 2010.

YEO TENG YANG TAY KAH CHYE
Lead Independent Director Independent Director
Mr Yeo Teng Yang, 70, is the lead independent director. Currently Mr Tay Kah Chye, 65, is currently the Chairman and CEO of
he is also an independent director of United International Monsoon Investments Holding Private Limited, a regional
Securities Limited, Singapore. He has a varied international career investment company, headquartered in Singapore. He has served
spanning senior positions in the Ministry of Finance and The as the Honorary Advisor of ASEAN Bankers Association, a regional
Monetary Authority of Singapore, Ambassador to the European banking industry group from 2008 to 2010. Prior to his retirement
Community in Brussels as well as Executive Director of the Asian on 31 December 2007, Mr Tay was the President and Chief
Development Bank, Manila and Advisor at the IMF, Washington D.C. Executive Officer of ASEAN Finance Corporation Limited, a regional
besides his extensive banking experience. From 1995 to 2000, he merchant bank based in Singapore and owned by various leading
was the Senior Executive Vice President of United Overseas Bank banks and financial institutions in ASEAN since 1991. Mr Tay has
Ltd, Singapore, with management responsibilities in treasury, vast experience in banking and finance. Mr Tay was with Citibank
international banking business, fund management, stockbroking N.A. Singapore Branch, where he started his banking career in 1973.
and risk management. He also served as a Board Member of Korea His last held position in Citibank was Vice President and Head of its
First Bank, South Korea, from 2000 to 2005. Mr Yeo holds a Bachelor Corporate Marketing Group. During his 18 years with Citibank, he
of Social Science Honours degree from the then University of held various positions in banking operations, credit management
Singapore and a Masters degree in Economics from Yale University, and marketing. Mr Tay is a member on the board of directors of,
USA. He was appointed on 14 July 2006 and was last re-elected on among others, Chemical Industries (Far East) Ltd and the Cambodia
29 April 2009. Mekong Bank Public Limited Company. Mr Tay holds a Bachelor of
Social Sciences degree in Economics from the then University of
Singapore. Mr Tay was appointed on 14 July 2006 and was last re-
LEONG HORN KEE elected on 29 April 2009.
Independent Director
Mr Leong Horn Kee, 59, has been an independent director since
2000 and was last re-elected on 28 April 2010. Currently, he is the KWAH THIAM HOCK
Chairman of CapitalCorp Partners Pte Ltd, and Singapore’s Non- Independent Director
resident Ambassador to Mexico. Mr Leong has established a wide Mr Kwah Thiam Hock, 65, sits on the board of various companies
career in the private sector with Far East Organization, Orchard including IFS Capital Limited, Select Group Limited, Excelpoint
Parade Holdings Limited, Yeo Hiap Seng Limited, Rothschild Technology Ltd and Teho International Inc Ltd. He started his
Singapore, Transtech Ventures and Natsteel group, as well as in career in 1964 with the Port of Singapore Authority. From 1969 to
the public sector with the Ministry of Trade & Industry and the 1970, he was an Assistant Accountant with the Singapore Textile
Ministry of Finance. In addition, he was a Singapore Member of Industries Limited. Subsequently, he served as the Secretary and
Parliament for 22 years. Mr Leong holds a Production Engineering Assistant Accountant in Singapore Spinners Private Limited from
degree from Loughborough University, UK; an Economics degree 1970 to 1973 and later in 1974, he moved on to become the
from London University, UK; a Chinese Language and Literature Regional Accountant and Deputy Manager of its related company,
degree from Beijing Normal University, China; an MBA degree from IMC (Singapore). Mr Kwah left to join ECICS Holdings Ltd in 1976
INSEAD, France; and a Master in Business Research from University and rose to become its President and Chief Executive Officer. He
of Western Australia. stepped down from ECICS Holdings Ltd in 2003 to assume the
position of Principal Officer and Chief Executive Officer of ECICS
Limited, a wholly-owned subsidiary of listed IFS Capital Limited.
Mr Kwah retired from ECICS Limited in December 2006 but he
remains as the non-executive Director of ECICS Limited. He is a
Fellow, Certified Public Accountant of Australia, ICPAS and ACCA.
He graduated from the then University of Singapore in 1973 with
a Bachelor of Accountancy degree. Mr Kwah was appointed on 14
July 2006 and was last re-elected on 28 April 2011.

Board of directors
continued
The principal directorships and major appointments of the directors, past and present, are set out below:
Name of Present Directorships Other Present Directorships/ Past directorships/

Director in Listed Companies Major Appointments major appointments
in the last 3 years
Kuok Khoon Hong Wilmar International Limited Lee Kuan Yew Exchange Fellowship
Chairman & CEO Director
Perennial China Retail Trust
Management Pte. Ltd.
(Trustee-Manager of Perennial China
Retail Trust)
Martua Sitorus Wilmar International Limited SIFCA SA
Executive Director & COO Member of Board of Trustees
PALMCI SA
(BRVM, Bourse Regionale des Valeurs,
Western Africa Regional Stock Exchange)
Teo Kim Yong Wilmar International Limited
Executive Director
Kencana Agri Limited
Kuok Khoon Chen Kerry Properties Limited Kerry Group Limited
(Hong Kong Stock Exchange) Deputy Chairman
Chairman Kerry Holdings Limited
China World Trade Center Company Chairman & MD
Limited Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad
(Shanghai Stock Exchange)
Chairman
China World Trade Center Ltd
Kuok Khoon Ean Shangri-La Asia Limited Kerry Group Limited
(Hong Kong Stock Exchange)
Kerry Holdings Limited
Executive Chairman
Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad
SCMP Group Limited
(Hong Kong Stock Exchange) Kuok (Singapore) Limited
Shangri-La Hotel Public Co. Ltd. China World Trade Center Ltd.
(Stock Exchange of Thailand) Singapore Management University
The Bank of East Asia, Limited Member of Board of Trustees
(Hong Kong Stock Exchange)
The Post Publishing Public
Co. Ltd.
(Stock Exchange of Thailand)
John Daniel Rice Wilmar International Limited Archer Daniels Midland Company
Vice Chairman
Yeo Teng Yang United International Securities Limited Overseas Union
Wilmar International Limited Securities Ltd

Name of Present Directorships Other Present Directorships/ Past directorships/
Director in Listed Companies Major Appointments major appointments
in the last 3 years
Leong Horn Kee Amtek Engineering Ltd CapitalCorp Partners Pte Ltd Biosensors International
China Energy Ltd Chairman & CEO Group Ltd
ECS Holdings Ltd Austin International Management School NTUC Thrift & Loan
Pte Ltd Co-operative Ltd
Kian Ho Bearings Ltd
CapitalCorp Assets Pte Ltd Crimson Lofts Pte Ltd
Linair Technologies Ltd
CapitalCorp Consulting Group Pte Ltd
Tat Hong Holdings Ltd
HLU Holdings Pte Ltd
Orita Sinclair School of Design, New Media
and the Arts Pte Ltd
PeopleWorldwide Consulting Private Limited
PeopleWorldwide Academy Pte Ltd
VGS Technology Pte Ltd
Non-Resident Ambassador to Mexico
Securities Industry Council
Member
Asia Capital Reinsurance Group Pte Ltd
Senior Advisor
Tay Kah Chye Chemical Industries Monsoon Investments Holding T & W Associates LLP
(Far East) Ltd Private Limited Partner
Wilmar International Limited Chairman & CEO
Monsoon Lifestyle Products Pte Ltd
Monsoon Enterprise Pte Ltd
Cam Box Investment Pte Ltd
Cam Box Holding Pte Ltd
Cam Box Pte Ltd
Cambodia Cables & Engineering
Co Ltd
Cambodia Mekong Bank Public Ltd
Company
Nagamed Public Ltd Company
Pharmalink Public Ltd Company
Global Action for Environment Awareness Plc
CLMV Consult Net (Private Limited)
Kwah Thiam Hock Excelpoint Technology Ltd ECICS Limited Swissco
IFS Capital Limited Northern Star Shipping Pte Ltd International
Limited
Select Group Limited Ezion Offshore Logistic Hub Ltd
Teho International Inc Ltd PM Shipping Pte Ltd

key
management team
Mr Kuok Khoon Hong Mr Mu YanKui Mr Ho Kiam Kong

Chairman and Chief Executive Officer Vice Chairman and Head of Northern Chief Financial Officer
Region & Grains Trading, China Division
Mr Martua Sitorus Ms Sng Miow Ching
Executive Director and Mr Niu Yu Xin Group Financial Controller
Chief Operating Officer General Manager and Head of Central
Region & Oils Trading, China Division Ms Teo La-Mei
Mr Teo Kim Yong Group Legal Counsel &
Executive Director Mr Ian Glasson Joint Company Secretary
(Commercial) Chief Executive Officer
Sucrogen Limited Mr Patrick Tan Soo Chay
Mr Goh Ing Sing Head of Internal Audit
Head of Plantations Division Mr Jean-Luc Robert
Bohbot Mr Jeremy Goon
Mr Matthew John Managing Director Group Head of
Morgenroth Wilmar Sugar Pte Ltd Corporate Social Responsibility
Group Technical Head
Captain Kenny
Mr Hendri Saksti Beh Hang Chwee
Head of Operations, Indonesia Managing Director,
Raffles Shipping Corporation Pte Ltd
Mr Yee Chek Toong
Head of Operations, Malaysia Professor Chua Nam-Hai
Chief Scientific Advisor
Mr Rahul Kale
Group Head of Oleochemicals & Biofuels

corporate
information
Board of Directors Audit Committee Company

Kuok Khoon Hong Tay Kah Chye Secretaries
(Chairman) (Chairman) Teo La-Mei
Martua Sitorus Kwah Thiam Hock Colin Tan Tiang Soon
Teo Kim Yong Yeo Teng Yang
Kuok Khoon Chen Registered Office
Nominating 56 Neil Road
Kuok Khoon Ean
Committee Singapore 088830
John Daniel Rice Telephone: (65) 6216 0244
Kwah Thiam Hock
Yeo Teng Yang (Chairman) Facsimile: (65) 6836 1709
Leong Horn Kee Kuok Khoon Hong
Tay Kah Chye Share Registrar
Tay Kah Chye Tricor Barbinder Share
Kwah Thiam Hock
Registration Services
Remuneration 80 Robinson Road #02-00
Executive Committee Singapore 068898
Committee Kwah Thiam Hock Telephone: (65) 6236 3333
Kuok Khoon Hong (Chairman) Facsimile: (65) 6236 3405
(Chairman) Kuok Khoon Ean
Martua Sitorus Yeo Teng Yang Auditors
Teo Kim Yong Ernst & Young LLP
Leong Horn Kee
One Raffles Quay
#18-01 North Tower
Risk Management
Singapore 048583
Committee Partner-in-Charge: Lim Tze Yuen
Yeo Teng Yang (Appointed since financial year
(Chairman) ended 31 December 2011)
Kuok Khoon Hong
Leong Horn Kee

Synergistic
Operations
Sustainable
Practices
A key competitive strength of Wilmar is its resilient
integrated business model that forms the foundation for
achieving economic, social and environmental viability.
The Group views sustainability as an integral part of its

business operations and is constantly seeking ways to
incorporate sustainable practices within its processes.
247,081 hectares
Total planted area in Indonesia, Malaysia and Africa
as at 31 December 2011
operations
review
Merchandising & Processing – Palm & Laurics
Wilmar is the world’s largest processor and merchandiser of palm Oleo- Specialty
and lauric oils with a distribution network spanning more than 50 Refinery chemicals Fats Biodiesel
countries. The Group processes palm and lauric oils into refined Associates
oils, specialty fats, oleochemicals and biodiesel.
India 19 – 5 –
The Group owns processing plants in major palm producing China 9 1 2 –
countries in Indonesia and Malaysia, as well as in consuming Russia 4 – 3 –
markets such as China, Europe, Vietnam, Sri Lanka and Ghana. Ukraine 2 – 1 –
Through joint ventures, Wilmar also has processing plants in India, Malaysia 3 – – –
Russia, Ukraine, Ivory Coast, Uganda and Bangladesh.
Bangladesh 1 – 1 –
As at 31 December 2011, the Group had plants located in the Others 2 – 1 –
following countries: Total no. of plants 40 1 13 –
Oleo- Specialty Total capacity
Refinery chemicals Fats Biodiesel (million MT p.a.) 8 <1 1 –
Subsidiaries Note:
Refinery capacity includes palm oil and soft oils.
Indonesia 23 1 2 7
Malaysia 13 1 1 1
Industry Trend in 2011
China 51 7 6 – In 2011, global palm oil production rose by approximately 9%
Europe 4 – 1 – to 50.0 million MT. Malaysia and Indonesia palm oil production
grew by about 9% to 43.0 million MT, constituting 86% of global
Vietnam 2 – 1 –
production.
Others 5 – 1 –
Total no. of plants 98 9 12 8 Consumption of palm oil in 2011 registered a steady growth of
Total capacity 5% to 48.0 million MT. Demand from India, the largest palm oil
(million MT p.a.) 23 1 1 2 consuming market, remained firm at 6.8 million MT. Indonesia, the
second largest consuming market, saw demand increase by 15%
Note:
Refinery capacity includes palm oil and soft oils. to 6.2 million MT due to economic expansion and changes in the
palm oil export tax structure. Other key markets, such as China,
continued to record high demand for palm oil. Consumption
growth in Eastern Europe and Africa was also strong. However,
demand in Western Europe declined by more than 9% as a result
of the weak macro-economic environment.

Cleaner Air for Employees and the Community: prevent the natural convection of odour. The effluent pond
It is inevitable that some manufacturing processes emit an was covered and sealed tightly, and a blower was used to
unpleasant odour as a by-product and thus compromise air quality. channel the gases to a deodouriser located at the top of the
plant. The deodouriser uses active bacteria to break down
In the case of Yihai (Guangzhou) Oils & Grains Industries Co., and absorb the odour from the gases, before discharging the
Ltd, the refining process entails a filtration procedure that treated gases through a 25-metre chimney.
releases odour. To overcome this, a heat exchanger was put in
place to allow steam and vapour from the filtering process to The elimination of unpleasant odours improves air quality and
condense and be channeled to the effluent treatment plant. makes for a more pleasant environment for everyone working
At this point, another technical modification was made to around the plant as well as those residing in the vicinity.
Elimination of odours enhances air quality and thereby makes for a cleaner and
more pleasant environment. Wilmar strives to minimise the undesired impact of its
operations on its employees and the community.
Following from the rising trend in the second half of 2010, palm also boosted margins in Indonesia in the fourth quarter. However,
oil prices continued to increase and reached a record high of this gain was offset by poorer margins in other markets. Overall, the
RM3,967 (approximately US$1,305) per MT in February. However, Group recorded a pretax profit of US$585.9 million in 2011, similar
in the second quarter, demand rationing at higher prices and a to the level achieved in 2010.
narrowing discount to soybean oil prices, along with concerns of
a financial crisis in the US and Europe led to a steady decline in Outlook and Strategy
palm oil prices for most of the year. Nonetheless, the average palm Wilmar is positive about the long-term prospects for palm oil due
oil price in 2011 was still higher compared to 2010. to the growing demand from both food and non-food industries.
In the short to medium term, the Group is also expected to
Our Performance benefit from changes in the palm oil export tax structure in
In 2011, the Group merchandised and processed 20.3 million MT Indonesia. Growth in palm oil production in 2012 is expected
of palm and laurics, a 2% decrease from 2010. The Group’s pretax to be moderate compared to 2011. Combined production from
margins improved by 2% in 2011 due to firmer margins in the first Indonesia and Malaysia is expected to increase to approximately
half of the year as the Group benefited from higher crude palm oil 45.0 million MT in 2012, mainly due to the increase in mature
(CPO) supply and its operations across the palm value chain, covering hectarage in Indonesia. The Group’s long-term strategy is to
high value-added products such as oleochemicals, specialty fats continue to invest in processing capacity, including higher
and biodiesel. The changes in the Indonesian export tax structure value-added downstream products, to enable it to capture the
for palm products, which came into effect on 15 September 2011, growing demand for palm oil.

operations
review
Merchandising & Processing – Oilseeds & Grains
In China, Wilmar is the leading oilseeds crusher. The Group processes Industry Trend in 2011
oilseeds such as soybean, rapeseed, groundnut, cottonseed, China is the largest importer of soybeans, accounting for approximately
sunflower seed and sesame seed into protein meal and edible oils. 59% of global imports. The country imported about 52.0 million MT
Protein meal is mainly used by feed millers to produce animal feed. of soybeans, representing a growth of about 4%. The Group is the
The edible oils produced are largely sold to its consumer products largest importer of soybeans in China.
division. The Group also has oilseeds crushing operations in India,
Malaysia and Russia. In spite of lower import growth, total volume of soybeans crushed
in China increased by about 13% to 55.0 million MT, reflecting
Wilmar is also one of the largest wheat and rice millers in China. some de-stocking in the industry following the excessive supply of
The Group engages in the milling of wheat into wheat flour and soybeans in 2010. The growth in crush volume was achieved through
the milling of paddy into rice, rice bran and rice bran oil. increased consumption in line with China’s economic growth as well
as increased crushing capacity. China’s soybean meal consumption
As at 31 December 2011, the Group had crushing plants and flour grew by about 16% to 43.0 million MT in 2011, while consumption
and rice mills located in the following countries: in soybean oil increased by 6% to 11.0 million MT.
Flour Rice 2011 was a challenging year as commodity prices were volatile due
Crushing milling milling to uncertain market conditions. Soybean prices remained high for
Subsidiaries the first three quarters of 2011 after the surge in prices in the last
China 50 9 14 quarter of 2010. During the fourth quarter of 2011, soybean prices
Malaysia 1 – – fell sharply due to higher than expected supply of soybeans from
Vietnam 1 – – Brazil and Argentina as well as the debt crisis in Europe.
South Africa 2 – –
Total no. of plants 54 9 14
Total capacity (million MT p.a.) 20 3 2 Our Performance
Associates During the year, the Group reported a growth of 9% in volume
China 14 1 1 to 19.9 million MT, due mainly to improved demand from the
India 8 – – livestock industry as well as higher flour and rice volume. Despite
Russia 2 – – a competitive operating environment, the Group’s pretax margins
Malaysia – 5 – improved significantly in 2011 due to the timely purchases of raw
materials. This contributed to a 260% increase in pretax profit to
Others – 2 –
US$422.9 million.
Total no. of plants 24 8 1
Total capacity (million MT p.a.) 10 2 <1

An endorser of the United Nations Recycling a Precious Natural Resource:
The rapid depletion of natural resources and escalating water
Global Compact’s CEO Water cost have prompted the establishment of an effluent treatment
plant at Qinhuangdao Goldensea Foodstuff Industries Co., Ltd,
Mandate, Wilmar recognises the a leading agricultural processor in China. After treatment which
includes the addition of anti-bacteria and regenerating agents,
consequences of the emerging global the reclaimed water can be used to replace tap water in certain
water crisis and is committed to production processes; while the discharge of treated effluent
water will reduce environmental pollution. With a treatment
sound water management. capacity of 1,500 tonnes of wastewater per day, the plant is
able to reap an annual savings of about 450,000 tonnes of
water and over RMB 2.0 million in cost.
Construction and commissioning of the full scale water

Treatment capacity of
1,500 tonnes
reclamation plant commenced in February 2011. The plant
has been fully operational since November 2011.
o f wa s t e wat e r p e r day
Outlook and strategy continue to drive demand for high quality food and agri-products.
Market conditions are expected to remain challenging in 2012 for The Group remains committed to research and development to
Oilseeds and Grains due to increased industry crushing capacity produce new and better quality products to meet customers’
and volatile commodity prices. However, growth in China will discerning expectations.

operations
review
Consumer Products
Wilmar produces consumer packs of edible oils, rice, flour and The total industry volume for consumer pack rice in China was
grains which are marketed under its own brands. In China, the approximately 6.0 million MT in 2011 while the total industry
Group is the largest producer of consumer pack edible oils with volume for consumer pack flour grew by 25% to 2.0 million MT in
approximately 50% market share. The Group also has significant 2011. The market share for consumer pack rice and flour versus
share in the consumer pack edible oils markets in India, Indonesia, other forms of rice and flour remain relatively low at less than 5%.
Vietnam and Bangladesh. Its joint venture in India, Adani Wilmar
Limited, is the leading producer of consumer pack oils, having
approximately 15% market share. In Indonesia, the Group is the Our performance
second largest producer of consumer pack oils with over 30% During the year, the Group’s total sales volume was 20% higher
market share. In Vietnam, the Group is the largest producer of compared to 2010 mainly due to improved sales of consumer
consumer pack oils with over 55% market share. Wilmar is also pack oils, flour and rice in China. However, pretax margin was
one of the leading producers in Bangladesh with close to 20% lower than in 2010 because of the price increase restriction in
market share. China during the first seven months of 2011 together with the
higher feedstock cost. This resulted in a 43% decline in pretax
The Group’s rice and flour businesses in China continued to profit to US$85.3 million.
progress in 2011 as volumes increased more than 30% respectively
in each business.
Outlook and strategy
The Group is optimistic about the longer-term prospects for
Industry trend in 2011 consumer products due to economic growth, low per capita
The total industry volume for consumer pack oils in China grew consumption and the continued shift from the consumption
by about 11% to approximately 6.7 million MT in 2011. The market of loose to quality branded consumer pack products in its key
share for consumer pack oils versus other forms of edible oils markets. In these markets, the Group will continue to focus on brand
increased from 26% of total edible oils consumed in China in building, increasing retail penetration and product innovation to
2010 to 27% in 2011, reflecting the rising popularity of pack oils. strengthen its market presence.
In India, Indonesia, Vietnam and Bangladesh, demand for branded

consumer pack oils continued to increase due to growing affluence
and urbanisation.

Reducing Greenhouse Gas Emissions with Green Fuel:
At Yihai Kerry Industries (Gaodong), industrial wastewater
Biogas increases global energy is recycled to produce biogas which in turn generates
electricity to power the effluent water treatment plant and
security by offsetting non-renewable compressor room.
resources such as coal and oil. It also
Organic compounds present in the wastewater undergo
lowers greenhouse gas emissions by anaerobic digestion (decomposition without oxygen) and
produce as a by-product biogas of around 65% methane
preventing methane release into the gas. The collection of biogas is carried out through a process
atmosphere and contributes to a cleaner of dewatering, desulphurisation and compression. Upon
combustion, every cubic meter of biogas can produce
environment by reducing landfill waste approximately 1.8 kWh of electricity. With a daily output of
approximately 3,500 kWh of electricity, the biogas generator
and odours, produces nutrient-rich liquid is able to reap cost savings of RMB 650,000 annually.
fertiliser and requires less land than
The biogas generator has been fully operational since
aerobic composting. February 2011.

operations
review
Plantations and Palm Oil Mills
Wilmar is one of the largest oil palm plantation owners with a total Higher FFB production
planted area of 247,081 hectares (ha) as at 31 December 2011. About The Group’s FFB production rose 22% to 4.1 million MT due to
74% of the total planted area is located in Indonesia, 24% in East an increase in mature area from 186,688 ha in 2010 to 205,485
Malaysia and 2% in Africa. In Indonesia, it also manages 38,021 ha ha. FFB yield increased to 19.8 MT per ha due to improved crop
under the Group’s Plasma scheme. It processes fresh fruit bunches trend, improving yield of the young palm trees and favourable
(FFB) sourced from its own plantations, smallholders under the weather conditions.
Plasma and Outgrowers schemes, as well as third-party suppliers.
The crude palm oil (CPO) and palm kernel produced by its palm oil
mills are predominantly supplied to its refineries and palm kernel Sustainability and certification
crushing plants. The Group’s plantations and milling processes adhere strictly to the
Principles and Criteria of the Roundtable on Sustainable Palm Oil
The Group also owns plantations in Uganda and West Africa via joint (RSPO), which include the protection of high conservation value land,
ventures. Total planted area in Uganda and West Africa are approximately treatment of wastewater and provision of community services. The
6,000 ha and 39,000 ha respectively. In addition, the joint ventures Group is on track with the audit progress for RSPO certification of its
manage over 300 ha and 140,000 ha under the Outgrowers scheme plantations and mills. Thus far, all of its Malaysian mills and five of its
in Uganda and West Africa respectively. Indonesian mills have successfully completed certification.
For more information on sustainability, please refer to the Corporate

Plantation age profile as at Social Responsibility section.
31 December 2011
Our performance
16% 12% 0 – 3 years The Group registered a pretax profit of US$733.8 million in 2011, a
15% increase from 2010. Pretax profit included a revaluation gain
4 – 6 years
from biological assets of US$262.7 million. The revaluation was made
14% Total planted area 7 – 14 years to better reflect the current market value of palm plantations and
= 247,081 ha 33% 15 – 18 years an increase in the Group’s mature hectarage. Excluding this gain,
pretax profit was US$471.2 million, a 22% growth from pretax profit
> 18 years in 2010. This was mainly because of higher production and CPO
25% prices realised. Unit production costs for 2011 were higher due to
increased labour, fertiliser, fuel and repairs and maintenance costs.

Lending a Hand to Smallholders: Smallholders are a key stakeholder
Smallholders, as defined by the RSPO, are farmers growing oil
palm, sometimes along with subsistence production of other of Wilmar’s operations – particularly
crops, where the family provides the majority of labour and
the farm the principle source of income. Wilmar is an active in Indonesia where they account for
supporter of smallholder programmes in Indonesia, Malaysia
and West Africa. more than 40% of the country’s total
In Indonesia, the Group manages some 38,021ha under the
palm oil production.
government-initiated Plasma Scheme which includes helping
smallholders in micro-financing, land-clearing, planting,
Smallholders are an integral part of Wilmar’s supply chain and as
and imparting good agricultural practices. In the early years
part of its commitment to help them achieve RSPO certification,
of plantation development before the oil palm trees reach
the Group provides training on plantation management practices
maturity, the livelihoods of smallholders are supported through
and financial arrangement.
employment with Wilmar. They typically work as labourers on
the estates while at the same time learning the agronomy of
oil palm cultivation. Once developed, the plantation will be
handed over to the smallholder for self-management.
Outlook and strategy higher mature hectarage and yield improvement. The Group is also
Consumption for palm oil is expected to grow steadily over the optimistic about the longer-term prospects for Africa because of its
years. Emerging markets like China, India, Indonesia and Pakistan are availability of land and labour as well as suitable climate. Wilmar will
expected to be the key demand drivers for palm oil. The Group will continue to explore opportunities to expand its hectarage mainly
increase its planted area through new plantings and acquisitions. in Indonesia and Africa.
Indonesia will be largely responsible for supply growth through

operations
review
Sugar
Wilmar expanded into the sugar business in 2010 through the As at 31 December 2011, the Group has sugar mills and refining
acquisition of Sucrogen Limited, one of the world’s largest raw sugar plants in the following countries:
producers, and PT Jawamanis Rafinasi, a leading sugar refiner in Milling Refining
Indonesia. In 2011, the Group further expanded its sugar presence Australia 8 2
in both Indonesia and Australia. In July, it acquired Duta Sugar New Zealand – 1
International, one of the eight licensed sugar refineries in Indonesia. Indonesia – 2
In December, the Group (through Sucrogen) increased its raw
Total no. of mills / plants 8 5
sugar capacity by about 10% through the successful acquisition of
Total annual capacity (million MT) 17 2
Proserpine Mill, Australia’s fifth largest sugar mill.
The Group’s sugar business involves the milling of sugarcane to Industry Trend
produce raw sugar and the refining of raw sugar to produce food- In 2011, adverse weather conditions, a number of crop surprises
grade products. In addition, the Group produces ethanol as a well as coupled with an unpredictable macro-economic environment
fertiliser, using by-products from its milling operations. The Group’s resulted in an uncertain and volatile sugar market throughout the year.
mills in Australia also generate their own electricity by burning
sugarcane fibre (bagasse). Excess electricity not required in the Sugar prices reached a record of around 36 cents/pound in February
milling operations is sold into the local electricity grid. on the back of a tight world market exacerbated by cyclone Yasi
hitting Australia. Prices started to decline following the earthquake
The refining of sugar produces food-grade products such as white in Japan, riots in North Africa and an unexpected record crop in
sugar, brown sugar, caster sugar and syrups. The Group’s sugar refining Thailand, resulting in prices hitting a low of 20 cents/pound in early
business supplies a broad range of industrial and consumer markets May. A lower than expected crop in Brazil resulted in an up-trend
and its products are distributed in both bulk and packaged forms. around July but prices ultimately ended the year lower at around
23 cents/pound due to record crops in Europe and Russia, as well
In Australia and New Zealand, the Group’s refined sugar products as the uncertainty caused by the European debt crisis.
represent over 60% of volume sales across the retail, food service
and food and beverage ingredients markets. The business also
exports to many Asia Pacific and European markets. The Group Our Performance
owns the leading brands in the Australian and New Zealand sugar For FY2011, this new Sugar segment reported a pretax profit of
and sweetener markets, CSR and Chelsea, respectively. The sugar US$141.3 million. Excluding non-operating items, pretax profit was
refining business in Australia and New Zealand is a joint venture US$94.2 million.
with Mackay Sugar who has a 25% stake.
Milling
In Indonesia, both refineries are licensed to import raw sugar and In 2011, the volume of cane crushed was 13.5 million MT while
supply refined sugar to the food and beverage manufacturing commercial cane sugar content was 13%. The Milling business
industry. The Group has a market share of more than 20% in Indonesia. reported revenue of US$1.16 billion and volume of approximately

Protecting the Environment with Renewable Energy: continue to operate after each year’s cane crushing season
At Sucrogen’s eight sugar mills, sugarcane is not just used to is finalised.
produce raw sugar. It also powers the factories with renewable
energy. Steam is generated from burning bagasse – the fibrous Sucrogen is Australia’s largest producer of renewable energy
material leftover from crushed sugarcane. The energy in the from biomass. Its eight mills have a total cogeneration capacity
generated steam is either converted into electricity using large of 197 MW, with a surplus of 123 MW exported into the
turbines or used as heat in the factories. Surplus electricity not Queensland power grid. More than 550 GWh of green energy
required by the mills is exported into Queenland’s power grid. is produced annually – enough to meet the power needs of
This is known as cogeneration. about 30,000 households each year.
Sucrogen’s Pioneer Mill, in the Burdekin region, has one of In addition to producing renewable electricity, Sucrogen
Australia’s largest cogeneration plants operating on bagasse. also produces renewable fuel (ethanol) from a milling by-
Completed in July 2005, the plant is capable of generating product – molasses. These two activities allow Sucrogen to
68 megawatts (MW) of power. Pioneer Mill houses specially fully balance the direct carbon emissions from its raw sugar
designed storage pads to accommodate excess bagasse from production activities, ensuring a sustainable operating model
Sucrogen’s three other Burdekin mills, thereby enabling it to for the future.
2.7 million MT. Sales volume included 1.8 million MT of raw sugar, Outlook and Strategy
with the balance from molasses, liquid fertiliser and ethanol. Pretax Asian and Middle Eastern countries are expected to account for
profit was US$85.7 million for the year. Excluding non-operating around 50% of total world sugar imports given their economic growth
items*, pretax profit was US$48.5 million. Pretax profit was affected and low per capita sugar consumption. In particular, Indonesia is
by the receipt of poorer quality stand over cane from the previous expected to be one of the largest sugar importers in 2012, importing
season with high impurity levels and low cane extraction rate, as around two to three million MT of sugar.
well as wet weather downtime in certain regions.
The Group is well positioned to meet this potential growth in Asia and
Merchandising and Processing intends to grow its sugar operations through investment in research
The Merchandising and Processing business reported a revenue of and development, asset renewal, new product development and
US$2.04 billion and sales volume of 2.5 million MT. Pretax profit was expansion into key international markets. In pursuing this strategy,
US$55.5 million for the year. Excluding non-operating items*, pretax the Group intends to combine an experienced sugar management
profit was US$45.7 million. The business benefited from favourable team, extensive business network and global market intelligence to
margins in the first nine months of the year. identify growth opportunities through internal expansion as well
* Non-operating items included an accounting profit relating to pre-acquisition hedging as acquisitions and investments in key markets including Indonesia
reserves, a foreign exchange gain arising from US$ intercompany loans and interest and other high potential Asian markets.
expense on borrowings directly attributable to the funding of the Sucrogen acquisition.

operations
review
Fertiliser Shipping
Fertiliser Shipping
The bulk of the Group’s fertiliser outputs is sold in Indonesia. Wilmar is As part of the Group’s integrated business model, it owns a fleet
one of the largest fertiliser players in Indonesia, with production lines of vessels which caters primarily to in-house needs. The fleet
focusing on NPK (nitrogen, phosphorus and potassium) compound improves the flexibility and efficiency of its logistics operations.
fertilisers. It also engages in the trading and distribution of potash, About 30% of the Group’s liquid bulk shipping requirement is met
phosphate, and nitrogen fertilisers as well as secondary nutrients by internal vessels. Its subsidiary, Raffles Shipping Corporation Pte
and trace element products. Wilmar has been able to maintain Ltd, manages the shipping operations.
substantial market shares of both potash and NPK in Indonesia,
particularly in the oil palm sector. Customers of the fertiliser products Volumes for vegetable oils and oilseeds increased in 2011. In addition,
are also the Group’s suppliers of FFB, CPO and palm kernel, enabling freight rates for vegetable oils increased. These factors resulted
it to tap this captive market and minimise credit risk. Indonesian oil in higher operating profitability in 2011 for the shipping unit. As
palm plantations have been expanding in the past decade, resulting at 31 December 2011, the Group owned a total of 25 liquid bulk
in increasing demand for fertilisers and providing the Group with vessels with a combined tonnage of 828,000 deadweight tonnes.
opportunities to continuously expand its fertiliser business unit. An
additional line with capacity of 200,000 MT annually will come on The Group currently has outstanding orders for 12 Kamsarmax bulk
stream by the middle of 2012 in Gresik, Surabaya. This will bring the carriers with tonnage of about 82,000 deadweight tonnes each.
Group’s total NPK production capacity to one million MT annually. Two vessels are expected to be delivered around end-March 2012.
In addition, the Group has also placed orders for four handy-sized
Revenue from the Group’s fertiliser unit was higher in 2011 due bulk carriers with tonnage of 36,000 deadweight tonnes each.
to higher sales volume and average selling prices. Higher sales
volume was driven by the full-year benefit of the Group’s new As the volume of edible oils, agri-products and fertilisers merchandised
plant in Gresik, stronger demand from oil palm plantations, and by the Group increases, it will continue to expand its shipping
better fertilisation programmes to increase yields. The prices of fleet and reduce shipping costs by acquiring larger and more cost
all three major nutrients were trending up and ended 2011 at effective vessels.
higher levels compared to the beginning of the year, reflecting
the healthy demand for fertiliser worldwide in view of favourable
commodities prices. Notwithstanding better sales numbers, the
overall profitability of the fertiliser unit declined in 2011 as a result
of higher cost of sales and market competition.

The Group believes the long-term agricultural prospects in
Indonesia remain positive, supported by continual growth in oil
palm acreage. Complementing the existing fertiliser business, the
Group has also focused on the agrochemical market, especially
in glyphosate herbicide.

Research & Development
The Group conducts research and development (R&D)

activities in China and Indonesia with the key objectives of
improving the quality and range of products and enhancing
overall operational efficiency. The Group plans to invest
more than US$120 million in R&D over the next five years.
The Global R&D Centre based in Shanghai has at present 200

employees of which 24 hold doctorate degrees. The number
of employees is expected to increase to 300 in about three
years. R&D activities undertaken in China are focused mainly
on edible oils, specialty fats, food technology, oleochemicals,
flavour chemistry, food ingredients and cereal processing.
R&D activities in Indonesia include research into agronomic

traits of oil palm, cloning of key oil palm genes involved in
fatty acid biosynthesis, environmentally friendly approaches
to control or prevent oil palm diseases, biofertilisers and
the use of microbes to improve plant growth and for waste
treatment.
Besides supporting the Group’s business and brands, the

R&D efforts continue to focus on providing sustainable
solutions to optimise resources, reduce energy consumption
and minimise environmental impact. One such example is
the rice milling operations in China where paddy husks, a
major by-product of the rice milling process, are used to
generate electricity and thereby mitigating carbon footprint.
Similar developments have also been made on oil and sugar
processing operations.
Looking forward, the Group’s R&D activities will expand to

include development of chemical processes and products that
can eliminate the use or generation of hazardous substances.

operations
review
Awards
CORPORATE AWARDS SUSTAINABILITY AWARDS

• Fortune Global 500, ranked 317th PT Multimas Nabati Asahan and PT Murini Samsam (Indonesia):
• World’s Most Admired Company, ranked 3 in Food Production
rd CSR Best Practice (Silver) for Wilmar Education Partnership Programme
Industry, by Fortune Magazine in conjunction with Indonesia’s Millennium Development Goals by
the Ministry of Social Welfare
• Global Chinese 1000 Award for Singapore by Yazhou Zhoukan
Magazine Cai Lan Oils & Fats Industries Company Ltd (Vietnam):
• Best Foreign Business in China by CCTV-2 and Roland Berger “For a Humane Community” Award by the Central Committee of
Strategy Consultants Vietnam Fatherland Front in honour of organisations which have
contributed actively to “For the Poor” fund of the Central Committee
• Most Transparent Company Award for Services, Utilities & Agriculture
of Vietnam Fatherland Front
category by Securities Investors Association (Singapore)
• Internal Audit Excellence Award (Merit) by Securities Investors “Noble Heart” Award by Ministry of Labour, Invalids and Society, and
Association (Singapore) Labour and Society Magazine in collaboration with Vietnam Investment
• Singapore 1000 – Net Profit Excellence Award (Wholesale) by Cooperation JSC and Vietnam Television Station. It recognises the
DP Info, supported by ACRA, IE Singapore, SPRING, IDA and company’s contribution to the sustainable development of community
Singapore Business Federation
Sucrogen Sweeteners (Australia):
• Singapore International 100 – Overseas Sales/Turnover Excellence
Finalist in the New Zealand Sustainable 60 Awards
Award (First place ranking) by DP Info, supported by ACRA, IE
Singapore, SPRING, IDA and Singapore Business Federation
Finalist in the New Zealand Workplace Health & Safety Awards –
• Singapore International 100 – Overseas Sales/Turnover Excellence ‘Best initiative to encourage engagement in health & safety’
By Markets Award (China, India, North Asia, Southeast Asia) by
DP Info, supported by ACRA, IE Singapore, SPRING, IDA and
Singapore Business Federation
CHINA GROUP OPERATIONS

Subsidiary Award Issuer
Yihai Kerry Investments Co., Ltd. 2011 Shanghai Enterprise Top 100 Shanghai Enterprise Confederation and
(Ranked 10th) Shanghai Enterprise Directors Association
Yihai (Shi Jiazhuang) Oils & Grains National Assured Oils & Grains Model China National Association of Grain Sector
Industries Co., Ltd Processing Enterprise
Yihai Kerry (Jilin) Oils, Grains & Model Oils & Grains Processing Enterprise Jilin Province Association of Grain Sector
Foodstuffs Industries Co., Ltd
Kerry Oils & Grains (Tianjin) Ltd China Foodstuff Industry Advanced China Food Industry Association
Enterprise for Good Implementation of
Performance Excellence Model
Qinhuangdao Goldensea Trustworthy Enterprises in Hebei Province Hebei Province Enterprise Directors Association
Foodstuff Industries Co., Ltd
Shenzhen Southseas Grains Trustworthy Model Enterprises in Guangdong Province Enterprise Confederation and
Industries Ltd Guangdong Province Guangdong Province Enterprise Directors Association
Yihai (Guangzhou) Oils & Grains 2011 Guangdong Enterprise Top 100 Guangdong Province Enterprise Confederation and
Industries Co., Ltd Guangdong Province Enterprise Directors Association
Yihai (Jiamusi) Oils & Grains Key Leading Enterprise in Heilongjiang Heilongjiang Province Agricultural Commission
Industries Co., Ltd Province
Yihai (Zhoukou) Oils & Grains 2011 Henan Foodstuff Enterprise Top 50 Industry and Information Technology Department of
Industries Co., Ltd. Henan Province

VIETNAM OPERATIONS CONSUMER PRODUCTS
Top 10 Viet Trademark – Science and Technology Application by Indonesia:
Vietnam Union of Science and Technology Associations (VUSTA) Brand Award
Vietnamese Golden Enterprise by Vietnam Association of Small Sania • Superbrand 2011 – 2012
and Medium Enterprises (VINASME) • Digital Marketing Award (Great Performing
Brand in Social Media)
Golden Dragon Award by Vietnam Economic Times • Marketing Award (Best Innovation in
Marketing)
Sania Royale • REBI (Rekor Bisnis) Award (Breakthrough
MERCHANDISING & PROCESSING Innovation)
Palm & Laurics • Product of the Year
Ghana Specialty Fats Industries Ltd was conferred the National
Award for Export Achievement, Gold Award for Shea (Karite) Oil
Vietnam:
by Ghana Export Promotion Authority
Brand Award
SUGAR Neptune • “Trust and Use” Certificate by Vietnam

Sucrogen Cane Products was conferred the Large Employer of Economic Times, VnEconomy and Ministry of
the Year Award by TecNQ Excellence Awards Industry and Trade
• Vietnamese High Quality Good Award by
Sucrogen BioEthanol was awarded the Fertiliser Industry Federation Saigon Tiep Thi newspaper
of Australia’s (FIFA) Eucalyptus Award • Top 20 Competitive Brands – Renowned
Brands of Vietnam by National Office of
Intellectual Property of Vietnam and Hanoi
Television Station
PLANTATIONS & PALM OIL MILLS
The following received certification from the Roundtable on Neptune, • Vietnam’s Trusted Products and Services
Simply and by Vietnam Association of Small and
Sustainable Palm Oil (RSPO).
Meizan Medium Enterprises, Vietnam Chamber of
Commerce and Industry, Communist Party of
Indonesia:
Vietnam Online Newspaper and Dong Nam
PT Kencana Sawit Indonesia (1 mill and 3 estates)
Communication JSC
PT Kerry Sawit Indonesia (1 mill and 3 estates)
• Top 500 Leading Products and Services
PT Tania Selatan (1 mill and 3 estates)
by National Committee on international
economic cooperation, Vietnam Association
Malaysia: of Small and Medium Enterprises and Vietnam
Sri Kamusan Sdn Bhd (1 mill and 6 estates) National Communication Group
Bangladesh:
Brand Award
Rupchanda • Best Brand in edible oil category and ranked
12th amongst all brands

Corporate
Citizenship
Sustainable
Development
Wilmar’s pledge to the United Nations Global Compact
is a reflection of its commitment to conducting
business in a responsible manner. The Group’s
sustainability initiatives comprise environmental
management, community development and
philanthropic efforts.
520,000 tonnes
Approximate combined supply of certified sustainable
palm oil from mills in Malaysia and Indonesia
corporate social
responsibility
2011 has been a rewarding and eventful year for Wilmar in the Some of Wilmar’s refineries, mills and plantations are now certified
arena of sustainability. The Group has achieved considerable against the ISCC standards. The achievement of ISCC certification
milestones with meaningful and strategic collaborations on the signifies that the Group’s products are in compliance with the
environmental conservation front, as well as new international strict sustainability criteria set by the European Union’s Renewable
sustainability benchmarks which it views as a step-up to its Energy Directive.
sustainability commitment. In some other areas however, its
performance fell short of expectations for which it endeavours CONSERVATION INITIATIVES
to provide a transparent report. Biodiversity and Agricultural Commodities
Programme (BACP)
INTERNATIONAL SUSTAINABILITY Under the matched funding initiative of the BACP initiated by the
BENCHMARKS International Finance Corporation, the two-year Zoological Society
RSPO Certification of London-Wilmar project was completed in 2011. This project
All of the Group’s mills and estates in Malaysia have successfully aimed to produce tools to assist oil palm growers to comply with
attained the Roundtable on Sustainable Palm Oil (RSPO) Certification. the RSPO Biodiversity Principles and Criteria (BP&C). As a result,
In Indonesia, five of the Group’s mills have been certified to date, a biodiversity and management toolkit was created to guide
with another one having completed its audit and is awaiting plantations in implementing the RSPO BP&C. The findings of the
certification approval. In total, Wilmar currently has an estimated project were also shared with plantation companies in Indonesia
production of about 520,000 tonnes of certified sustainable palm through workshops and a symposium in London attended by a
oil per annum. spectrum of sector representatives including industry players and
non-government organisations.
ISCC Certification
In addition to the RSPO certification, Wilmar is also diligently Encouraged by the project’s success, Wilmar signed a further one-
pursuing the International Sustainability and Carbon Certification year project extension with the Zoological Society of London that
(ISCC) which is developed for the certification of biomass and will focus on developing tools to assist growers on the monitoring
bioenergy with specific sustainability components across the of their High Conservation Value (HCV) areas as this is an aspect
entire biofuel supply chain. These components include: where very little guidance is currently provided to oil palm
growers. This new project will also see the novel development of
• Reduction of greenhouse gas emissions
a comprehensive database system.
• Sustainable use of land
• Protection of natural biospheres Orang Utan and Nature Conservation Education
Programme
• Social sustainability
In February, Wilmar held a week-long joint education programme
on the conservation of orang utans and nature with YAYORIN, an

Indonesian conservation NGO, and BKSDA, the Natural Resources CORPORATE PHILANTHROPY
and Conservational Agency of Indonesia’s Forestry Department. Wilmar’s philanthropic efforts stem from its belief in sharing its
Conducted in local language, the interactive workshop engaged success with the less fortunate. In China, the Group continues
participants using different media forms including presentations, to invest in a strong corporate philanthropy programme. To
films, educational games, discussions and printed materials such date, Wilmar has contributed a total of US$13 million in various
as t-shirts, posters and calendars. About 950 plantation managers, community development initiatives.
staff and workers from seven companies completed the course.
Children’s Education and Welfare
Development of Best Management Practices At as the end of 2011, a total of 25 primary and secondary schools
In June, Wilmar signed a tripartite Memorandum of Understanding have been set up in rural areas across China, of which 19 are
(MoU) with the Borneo Orangutan Survival Foundation (BOSF) and completed and operational while the remaining six are under
the Governor of Central Kalimantan, Indonesia, on the conservation construction. The setting up of these schools is estimated to have
of orang utans and their habitat in alignment with the Indonesian improved educational facilities for more than 12,000 rural students.
government’s vision to become a “Clean and Green Province”. To further empower learning, Wilmar also donated more than 500
The aim of this project is to develop Best Management Practices computers to schools in China’s Gansu province.
(BMP) guidelines for the conservation of orang utans in oil palm
plantations which can be applied at a large landscape level with Promoting children’s social welfare is a focus that Wilmar continues
adjacent oil palm plantations. Activities under the BMP will include to support actively. In June, Wilmar funded the building of a
the protection of orang utans and the enrichment of their habitat, rehabilitation playroom for children with special needs in an
translocation of any isolated orang utans, research, training and orphanage in Qingdao, China. In October, the Lianyungang Yihai
education, resolution of human-orang utan conflicts and community Orphanage held a groundbreaking ceremony. When completed,
development activities. it will provide orphans a conducive environment for growing up
and studying.
Support for the Orangutan Foundation International
As part of its ongoing orang utan conservation efforts, Wilmar is Healthcare for the Needy
currently sponsoring two orang utans in the Orangutan Foundation To date, the Group has funded over 14,000 life-changing cataract
International’s (OFI) Orangutan Care Centre and Quarantine (OCCQ) operations for the elderly and donated 2,500 much-needed
facility in Pangkalan Bun, Central Kalimantan. A joint programme wheelchairs to the disabled. Since July, the Group started to fund
of the OFI and the Indonesian Forestry Department, the facility over 20 successful prosthetic operations for patients who could
was established to provide medical care for confiscated, sick or not afford the medical procedure. During the year, Wilmar also
injured orang utans and prepare ex-captive orang utans for release completed the expansion of its nursing homes for the aged.
into the wild.

corporate social
responsibility
Nurturing Promising Young Minds

Recognising that education is the key to an evergreen human
talent pool, Wilmar, through its subsidiary in China, established
the Yihai Kerry Scholarship in collaboration with five of the
country’s leading universities – Peking University, Shanghai Jiao
Tong University, Tianjin University, East China University of Science
and Technology, and China Agricultural University. Commenced
in 2011, the scholarship programme will continue till 2014, with
about 200 outstanding students benefiting from it each year.
Back home in Singapore, Wilmar continues to advocate the value of Wilmar reinforces its advocacy of education through its China subsidiary.
The Yihai Kerry Scholarship Programme will benefit about 200 students
higher education through supporting several tertiary institutions. each year from 2011 to 2014 from five leading universities in China.
In May, the first cohort of six students at the Nanyang Business

School of Nanyang Technological University underwent a 10-week
internship in various Wilmar locations in Africa, Eastern Europe
and Central Asia. These were fully funded by the KKH Opportunity
Scholarship Fund founded by the Group’s Chairman and Chief
Executive Officer, Mr Kuok Khoon Hong.
Over at the newly-founded Singapore Institute of Technology,

the Group has established a scholarship fund for deserving
undergraduates. The Group also funded and will continue to
support the Lee Kuan Yew Global Business Plan Competition
at the Singapore Management University (SMU). Furthermore,
Wilmar continues its partnership with SMU whereby its students
conduct summer teaching programmes at the Group’s primary As part of Wilmar’s ongoing partnership with SMU, undergraduate
and secondary schools across China. students conduct summer teaching programmes where critical values of
leadership, teamwork and confidence are imparted to the young students
of Yihai Kerry schools.
The Group’s contribution to higher education in Singapore and
beyond amounted to over US$4 million in 2011. subsidiaries in Jambi, Indonesia. Wilmar recognises and understands
their perspectives on the welfare of the local communities, but
Reaching Out to the Community is disappointed that their reports did not reflect the reality and
Wilmar continually supports the good work of various Singapore- complexity of operating in Indonesia.
based charity organisations and voluntary welfare organisations
including the Singapore Children’s Society, Community Chest and The Group has land dispute resolution policies, systems and
Lion’s Club, amongst others. It also supports corporate initiatives mechanisms in place and complies with relevant laws and
such as the Singapore Exchange (SGX) Bull Run. regulations in the countries which it operates. It is firmly committed
to resolving the disputes in a peaceable and fair manner. For this
CHALLENGES case, the Group has enlisted the Compliance Advisor Ombudsman
Despite its best efforts at responsible business, the Group has of the World Bank to assist in the mediation and the process is
encountered challenges arising from operating in a complex currently ongoing.
business environment.
For a better understanding of the case and the operating landscape
In August, some civil society organisations raised concerns about in Indonesia, please refer to Wilmar’s Sustainability Report 2011 which
the issue of overlapping land rights at one of Wilmar’s plantation will be available in June 2012 at www.wilmar-international.com.

Key Performance Indicators
Environment
Paraquat Usage
Wilmar has, in 2011, fulfilled its commitment to completely phase out the use of paraquat, which is one of the most controversial
herbicides typically used for weed control in oil palm.
Water Usage
water use per tonne of ffb processed – mills (m3)

2.10
1.61 1.58 1.66

1.49 1.48
1.26
1.19 1.19
1.10
2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011
SABAH SARAWAK CENTRAL WEST Sumatra
KALIMANTAN KALIMANTAN
Biological Oxygen Demand (BOD) Levels

BOD is the amount of oxygen used when organic matter undergoes decomposition by microorganisms. Testing for BOD is done to
assess the amount of organic matter in water.
biological oxygen demand (BOD) levels by region and discharge destination (mg/l)
4,907*
864
614 558
29 170 170 173 111
38 26 28
2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011
SABAH SARAWAK Sumatra WEST central sumatra
KALIMANTAN kalimantan
R i v er D i sc h ar g e L a n d a p p l i c at i o n
Notes:
* The surge in BOD level in Central Kalimantan was due to a new mill whose effluent pond was not running well. While it is within the legal limit of 5,000mg/l for land application in Indonesia,
necessary corrective measures will be implemented and improvement targets set.
• There is no river discharge from the mills at Central Kalimantan as their effluent is sent directly to the plantations for land application.
• There is no land application activity in West Kalimantan.

corporate social
responsibility
Health & Safety

Lost Time Incident Rate
To reduce the lost time incident rate, the Group will be intensifying its efforts in health and safety awareness and training
programmes.
lost time incident rate – plantations

(per 200,000 working hours)
8.26
7.52
4.94
3.21
2.79 2.77
1.90
1.85
0.21 0.12
2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011
lost time incident rate – mills

(per 200,000 working hours)
7.36
6.78
6.37
3.93
1.34
0.61
0.14 – 0.13 0.06
2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011
Note:
Data for West Kalimantan is not available for 2010.

Fatalities
Every unfortunate fatality is followed up with a thorough review of cause and actions to prevent recurrence. The reviews are followed
by continued efforts in training and protective equipment use to minimise, if not eliminate, risks.
fatalities – plantations & mills

(Number of work-related deaths)
8*
0
2010 2011 2010 2011
malaysia indonesia
Note:
* Restated from 10 to 8 due to a different definition adopted by the Indonesian operations.

Enduring
Values
Sound
Governance
Wilmar’s growth is engined by a multinational team
dedicated to excellence. With the values of integrity
and transparency ingrained in its leadership, the
Group strives to formulate sound business strategies
and policies that will put it on a continual growth path.
Over 90,000
Global staff strength of diverse talent and culture
human capital
management
The Group’s business success is backed by a workforce of over 90,000 professionalism. Furthermore, a customised Learning Management
people globally. In 2011, the focus of its human resource strategy System has been developed to deliver a robust and engaging learning
was the strengthening of corporate culture, people development management solution as part of the wider workforce development
and nurturing talent to meet future manpower needs. plan to drive performance and support career development through
skill-upgrading of the workforce.
Reinforcing A Culture For Success

In line with its belief in an engaged employee being an effective An Employer of Choice
employee, Wilmar strives to build a strong and cohesive culture Injecting new and young blood is one way of keeping the workforce
founded on the core values of integrity, excellence and teamwork. It rejuvenated. The Group continued to harvest talent through
recognises that a conducive work environment can foster innovation, scholarships and executive programmes with universities. The
productivity and a sense of ownership among employees. partnerships with several top universities both locally and globally
have allowed the Group to green harvest talent. At the same time,
A holistic programme that encourages teamwork, inter-departmental the Group has participated innovatively at recruitment fairs such
interaction and work-life balance is implemented through a plethora as conducting on-site food-tasting of soy milk and rice noodles to
of staff events such as the annual Family & Recreational Day, annual evoke interest in its products. Wilmar has also actively organised
Dinner & Dance, Football Tournament and weekly sports and fitness and participated in many social activities to reinforce its corporate
activities. These serve to improve solidarity among participants and positioning as a leading company not only in business performance
cultivate a spirit of “Company is Family, Colleagues are Siblings”. but also an employer of choice for young talent. To further identify
emerging talents and develop potential across the businesses, a
Talent Management Framework has been put in place and the
Company and Employees Growing development of this framework will continue into 2012.
Together
As Wilmar grows, the scope and diversity of its businesses offer employees During the year, the Frontline Leadership Programme and Senior
tremendous career development and progression opportunities. In Leadership Development Programme were organised to build the
addition to educational programmes and on-the-job training, staff capabilities of people in frontline leadership roles as well as to focus
have the opportunity to be stationed at overseas locations to gain on building business acumen, stakeholder management, employee
exposure in different markets and trades. engagement, strategic planning and cross-cultural awareness in senior
leaders. Wilmar’s commitment to people development is reaffirmed
At some overseas locations, training is made more convenient through the maxim “We belong to Wilmar” which aims to deepen
through a comprehensive e-learning platform comprising more employees’ ties with the Company and provide an assurance that
than 360 e-courses on management skills, personal qualities and they have a career with the Company.

A Pleasant Home for Staff: Equal Opportunities for Women:
As an employer who cares for the wellbeing of its employees, Wilmar believes that a diverse workforce brings about a more
Wilmar aims to provide a pleasant living environment for staff in harmonious working environment and community. Despite being
oil palm plantations and mills operations – be they permanent a traditionally male-dominated business, the Group recognises that
operational staff, management executives or temporary labourers. women constitute a growing population of the world’s workforce
Workers are typically housed in brick buildings with indoor and makes a conscious effort to provide opportunities for women
plumbing and electricity. Staff live together with their families to advance in a non-threatening environment. Whether on the
while single workers are usually housed in gender-separated units ground or at a corporate level, female employees are treated no
with four workers to one house. Facilities such as community different from their male counterparts. They are ensured equal
halls, places of worship and schools are also built. Wilmar aims access to opportunities for occupational development and are
to adhere to a similar standard for new developments, including assessed based on the merit of their performance.
temporary housing.
Wilmar remains committed to developing human talent while nurturing future

capability to lead the Group on a sustainable path of growth.
Nurturing Talent for Sustainability Wilmar will continue to review regularly its human resource policies,
Manpower capability will continue to be a vital factor in Wilmar’s including a comprehensive and competitive compensation and
steady expansion. The Group’s extensive talent acquisition plans and benefits scheme, to ensure their effectiveness in retaining talent as
Talent Management Framework will enable it to fulfil its manpower well as motivating staff towards higher standards of performance,
needs to support the business. dedication and commitment.

Information
Technology
Wilmar Consultancy Services (WCS) is the Business Information Active Industry Engagement
Technology (IT) services arm of the Group. WCS positions itself as a During the year, WCS participated actively in key industry events. At
global business solutions company providing services in three main some of these events, WCS also presented insights and exchanged
service categories – IT Products and Solutions, Outsourcing, and perspectives with other industry players. Such engagement with the
Human Capital Services. WCS offers innovative business solutions to industry has helped WCS to stay abreast of the latest happenings and
help companies optimise business performance through consistent trends in the fast changing world of IT. At the same time, WCS has
service levels, lower total cost of ownership and higher productivity. successfully leveraged on such platforms to demonstrate its domain
expertise, heighten awareness of its services and develop potential
business opportunities.
Business Expansion and Growth
In recent years, China has emerged a global outsourcing leader and its In 2011, some of the industry events which WCS has participated
strong domestic market offers unprecedented business opportunities in include:
for overseas companies. Furthermore, the rapid development of China’s • China International Service Outsourcing Cooperation Conference,
economy has created strong demands for Research & Development Nanjing, China
(R&D) design, network maintenance, business consultation, financial • China International Software and Information Service Fair, Dalian,
management, talent cultivation and maintenance support. China
• China Sourcing Summit, Hangzhou, China
Riding the IT wave in China, WCS was on a solid growth trajectory • Human Resource Day, Singapore
in 2011. In July, WCS signed a Memorandum of Understanding with • IBM Security Event, Singapore
Wuxi National Hi-Tech Development Park which led to the setting up • Metro China Exhibition, Beijing, China
of an Outsourcing Center in November. The Center offers a range of • SAP Plantation Event, Jakarta, Indonesia
services including IT staffing, training, offshore software development • SAP Sapphire Now & TechEd, Beijing, China
and business process outsourcing. In September, WCS expanded its • SAP SME (Small and Medium Enterprises) Summit, Jakarta, Indonesia
presence in Shenzhen with the establishment of a Development • SAP World Tour, Singapore & Indonesia
Centre offering IT Infrastructure, E-Logistic, Supply Chain Management • SAP–IBM Seminar for FMCG (Fast Moving Consumer Goods)
services and solutions. Industry, Shanghai, China
The WCS Outsourcing Centre in

Wuxi, China, opened its doors in
November 2011, catering to IT
needs such as staffing, training,
offshore software development
and business process
outsourcing.

In July 2011, WCS and Wuxi National Hi-Tech Development Park signed a Through active participation in key industry events, WCS aims to heighten
Memorandum of Understanding. awareness of its services and develop potential business opportunities.
Improving Operational Efficiency SAP Outstanding Regional Rollout

With increasing competition and limited resources in today’s global This award commends WCS for successfully leveraging on SAP Business
marketplace, WCS is well-positioned to leverage on technology to Management Solution to integrate and transform their processes
improve its operational efficiency. throughout their various regional entities. WCS achieved breakthrough
results that helped to accelerate innovation and improve return on
WCS, in 2011, embarked on the development of the Project Portfolio investment within the regional entities.
Management (PPM) System with the objectives of automating its IT
processes and aligning its technology infrastructure to the company’s Hitachi Data Systems Most Innovative Use of Technology
overall goals. With the PPM System, capabilities are expanded through Innovation in technology is no longer about the newest technology,
eliminating time consuming manual processes. The PPM System is also but applying inspiration and innovation to technology to change the
designed to help executives with project prioritisation and timeline way a company does business or to create new services. This award
management. In addition, the PPM System makes available timely recognises WCS for its innovative application of storage solution in
critical information to the WCS management team, thereby enabling the region that made a difference to the company’s business.
them to execute strategic plans and maximise business returns.
The PPM System will be implemented within WCS in mid 2012 and Sustainable Growth Model
subsequently across the Wilmar group. WCS’ business strategy is to achieve sustainability with its clients. Its
growth model stems from operating from the heart of our clients’
businesses, from the technical system implementation to strategic
Testaments of Outstanding performance improvement. At the same time, WCS manages its
Performance operation with efficiency, in particular the hiring, training and deploying
In 2011, WCS was rewarded with accolades from the industry for its of resources around the world.
achievements. These will motivate the team to further its commitment
to excellence. To learn more about WCS’ services, please go to www.wcs-global.com.
Promising New SAP Ecosystem Partner

This award recognises the vital role WCS played in the SAP ecosystem.
WCS has collaborated closely with SAP to seek high-growth opportunities
and shared SAP’s passion for customer value and success.

Risk
management
Overview Foreign Exchange Risk
A robust and dynamic risk management continues to play a critical The Group’s reporting currency is U.S. Dollars (USD). The majority of
role in the Group’s business sustainability, and risk evaluation remains the Group’s exports from Indonesia and the bulk of its imports into
an integral part of its business strategy. Wilmar’s risk management China are denominated in USD, while the majority of the Group’s
framework comprises processes and policies designed to identify, expenses and sales elsewhere are denominated in the respective local
measure, monitor and manage the various types of risks the Group is currency. Foreign exchange risk arises from movements in foreign
exposed to. They are regularly assessed through reviews and enhanced currency exchange rates.
to ensure their adequacy and relevance.
Wilmar seeks to manage its foreign currency exposures by
In 2011, despite the European sovereign debt crisis and volatile market constructing natural hedges when it matches sales and purchases
conditions, Wilmar’s proactive approach to managing risks has ensured in any single currency, or through financial instruments such as
coverage against its exposure. Strong communication and a culture foreign currency forward contracts. Such contracts offer protection
of risk awareness and collaboration have enabled the Group to swiftly against volatility associated with foreign currency purchases and
respond to changing market and other risk conditions. sales of raw materials and other assets and liabilities arising in the
normal course of business.
Commodity Price Risk

Prices of agricultural commodities are affected by factors such as Interest Rate Risk
weather, government policies, global demographic changes and A substantial portion of the Group’s borrowings are in the form of
competition from substitution products, making them very volatile. In trade finance and short-term banking facilities. These are used to fund
sourcing raw materials and selling manufactured outputs, the Group operations and are transaction-related. Interest expense arising from such
is exposed to price fluctuations in the commodities markets because financing may vary depending on the stock holding period assumed
the sale and purchase commitments do not typically match at the at the time of entering into the transaction versus the actual time
end of each business day. The Group seeks to manage such risks taken to deliver the physical product and realise the proceeds of sale
by carefully monitoring its commodity positions and using forward from the end-customer. Consequently, interest expense is dependent
physical contracts and/or derivatives. on the volume of transactions and the cash conversion cycle, and it
is subsequently priced into the products. As such, short-term interest
rate movements have minimal impact on the net contribution margin.
To meet capital expenditures and working capital requirements, the
Group also has term loans which are exposed to interest rate risk.

Interest rate risk arising from floating rate loans is managed through Risk Governance
the use of interest rate derivatives with the primary objective of The Group’s risk governance structure comprises the Risk Management
limiting the extent to which net interest exposure could be affected Committee at the Board level, the Executive Risk Committee and risk
by adverse movements in interest rates. management by the respective operating units.
The Board-level Risk Management Committee, chaired by the Lead

Credit Risk Independent Director, oversees the Executive Risk Committee,
The majority of the Group’s sales are export sales in bulk, for which reviews the overall risk management guidelines/framework, reviews
letters of credit from customers or cash against the presentation and recommends risk limits as well as assesses the adequacy and
of documents of title are required. For domestic sales in China, the effectiveness of the risk management policies and systems.
Group may grant its more substantial customers credit terms while
requiring cash on delivery or advance payment for others. The Executive Risk Committee comprises Executive Directors.
Its responsibilities include, amongst others, the monitoring and
New customers’ credit worthiness is evaluated by considering their improvement of the overall effectiveness of its risk management
financial standings and operating track records as well as conducting system, the review of trade positions and limits to manage overall
background checks through industrial contacts. In this regard, the risk exposure.
Group benefits from the experience and local knowledge of its wide
manufacturing base and distribution network. Actual credit terms and The heads of operating units are responsible for monitoring their
limits to be granted are decided based on the information obtained. respective risks and adherence to trading policies and limits set by
As a practice, the Group will usually require a letter of credit for sales the Risk Management Committee and the Board.
to new customers.
To ensure proper segregation of authority and responsibility to
For existing customers who are granted credit facilities, the Group achieve effective governance and oversight, the Group has a Middle
will review periodically the credit terms granted. It will consider a Office independent of the front and back office. The Middle Office
customer’s current financial strength, payment history, transaction is responsible for the capture and measurement of Group-wide risks
volume and duration of its business relationship with the Group. It as well as for monitoring limit breaches. The Middle Office circulates
also monitors the outstanding trade debts to ensure that appropriate a daily risk exposure report, which is reviewed by the Executive Risk
steps are taken to collect such outstanding debts. Committee for any significant risk issues. The Middle Office also
sends out regular risk alerts to the merchandising team, Executive
Risk Committee and/or the Risk Management Committee when risk
exposure is seen to be nearing trigger levels.
The documented risk management policy clearly defines the

procedures for monitoring, controlling and reporting risk in a timely
and accurate manner. The Group has in place an overall risk tolerance
threshold recommended by the Risk Management Committee and
approved by the Board. The risk tolerance threshold refers to the
maximum potential loss of all open exposures across all products and
geographical regions at any given time. The risk tolerance threshold is
determined after taking account of the Group’s equity strength and
profitability as well as its overall production capacity, price trends of
raw materials, management’s overall view of the market, track record
of the management of risk exposure in the prior period and financial
budgets including projected sales volumes and turnover.

corporate
governance
Wilmar continually seeks to uphold a high standard of corporate In addition to the above, the Exco is tasked to supervise
governance guided by the principles set out in the Singapore Management’s delegated responsibilities in the following
Code of Corporate Governance (“Code”). This report describes the functions:
practices adopted by the Company.
• Draw up the Group’s annual budget and business plan for
the Board’s approval and ensure that the necessary financial
PRINCIPLE 1 resources are in place for the Company to meet its objectives;
The Board’s Conduct of its Affairs
• Evaluate new business opportunities and carrying through
The primary role of the Board is to provide entrepreneurial
leadership and set the overall business direction of the Group to approved strategic business proposals;
protect and enhance long-term shareholder value and returns. • Propose acquisitions and disposals of investments, businesses
The Board is committed to achieving sustained value creation and assets for approval by the Board or the Exco in accordance
through strategic and appropriate business expansion and to with the limits prescribed in the Exco’s terms of reference;
broadening the Group’s revenue stream by pursuing business
• Implement appropriate systems of internal accounting and
opportunities with good prospects for long-term growth. The
other controls;
Board reviews the strategic plans, business development proposals
and risk management policies of the Group directly or through the • Adopt suitably competitive human resource practices and
respective Board Committees. compensation policies and ensure that the necessary human
resources needs are met;
Apart from its statutory responsibilities, the Board is primarily
• Ensure that the Group operates within the approved budgets
responsible for:
and business direction; and
• Evaluating and approving the Group’s business strategies, key
• Set Company’s values and standards to ensure that obligations
operational initiatives, major investment and funding decisions;
to shareholders are understood and met.
• Ensuring that decisions and investments are consistent with
medium- and long-term strategic goals; The Exco meets on an informal basis and all decisions are placed
on record by way of written resolutions.
• Overseeing the management of principal risks that may
affect the Group’s businesses and ensuring that suitable risk
management systems are in place; and
2. Audit Committee
The Audit Committee (“AC”) comprises three Independent
• Reviewing Management’s performance and ensuring the Directors, Mr Tay Kah Chye (Chairman), Mr Kwah Thiam Hock
formulation of Group-wide policies and processes to promote and Mr Yeo Teng Yang, all of whom have accounting or relevant
high standards of business conduct by employees of the Group. financial management qualifications, expertise and experience.
As part of the Company’s corporate governance practices,
The Board conducts regular scheduled meetings on a quarterly basis all Directors are invited to attend all AC meetings which are
and ad-hoc meetings are convened, if warranted by circumstances convened at least four times annually. In addition, the AC meets
deemed appropriate by the Board. Between scheduled meetings, with the external and internal auditors at least once a year,
matters that require the Board’s approval are circulated to all without the presence of Management. Details of functions of
directors for their consideration and decision. As provided in the the AC are found in Principle 11 of this report.
Company’s Articles of Association, Directors may convene Board
meetings by teleconferencing and videoconferencing. To assist the 3. Risk Management Committee
Board in the execution of its duties, the Board has delegated specific The Risk Management Committee (“RMC”), which supports
functions to the following Board Committees: the Board in performing its risk oversight functions, is chaired
by Mr Yeo Teng Yang, the Lead Independent Director. The
1. Executive Committee other members of the RMC are Mr Kuok Khoon Hong and Mr
The Executive Committee (“Exco”) oversees the management Leong Horn Kee. The RMC meets no less than four times a
of the business and affairs of the Group in accordance with its year. Members of the Board are also invited to attend the RMC
terms of reference as approved by the Board, which may be meetings. The RMC would also hold informal meetings as and
revised from time to time. The members of the Exco are Mr Kuok when the need arises.
Khoon Hong (Chairman), Mr Martua Sitorus and Mr Teo Kim
Yong, all of whom are Executive Directors of the Company.

One of the principal tasks of the RMC is to recommend the 4. Nominating Committee
implementation of new risk policies and guidelines as well The Nominating Committee (“NC”) comprises three Directors,
as to review and, if necessary, to recommend changes to a majority of whom, including the Chairman, are Independent
existing risk management policies and guidelines to the Board Directors. The members are Mr Kwah Thiam Hock (Chairman),
for approval. In addition to the above, the RMC reviews risk Mr Kuok Khoon Hong and Mr Tay Kah Chye. The NC convenes
reports that monitor and control risk exposures on a regular its meetings at least once a year and Board members who are
basis to identify new risk exposures that may arise from non-NC members are also invited to attend its meetings. The
changes in the business environment. functions of the NC are enumerated in Principle 4 of this report.
In carrying out its duties, the RMC is assisted by the Executive 5. Remuneration Committee
Risk Committee (“ERC”). The ERC reviews trade positions and The Remuneration Committee (“RC”) comprises four members,
limits to manage overall risk exposure and is thus responsible namely Mr Kwah Thiam Hock (Chairman), Mr Kuok Khoon Ean,
for monitoring the overall effectiveness of the Group’s risk Mr Yeo Teng Yang and Mr Leong Horn Kee. Other than Mr Kuok
management system. The members of the ERC are Mr Kuok Khoon Ean who is a Non-Executive Director, all RC members are
Khoon Hong, Mr Martua Sitorus, Mr Teo Kim Yong and Mr Ho Independent Directors. The RC meets at least once a year with
Kiam Kong, the Company’s Chief Financial Officer, who was the Chief Executive Officer (“CEO”) in attendance. The role of the
appointed an ERC member on 1 January 2012 to replace Mr RC is set out in Principle 7 of this report.
Chua Phuay Hee who retired on 31 December 2011.
The Directors’ attendance at the Board and Board Committee
meetings during the financial year ended 31 December 2011 is
set out as follows:
Board of Audit Risk Management Remuneration Nominating

Directors Committee Committee Committee Committee
No. of meetings held 4 4 4 1 1
Name of Director Member Member Member Member Member
Attendance Attendance Attendance Attendance Attendance
Executive Directors
Kuok Khoon Hong 4/4 NM 4/4 NM 1/1
Martua Sitorus 4/4 NM NM NM NM
Chua Phuay Hee (Note 1)
4/4 NM NM NM NM
Teo Kim Yong 4/4 NM NM NM NM
Lee Hock Kuan (Note 2)
1/4 NM NM NM NM
Non-Executive Directors
Kuok Khoon Chen 3/4 NM NM NM NM
Kuok Khoon Ean 4/4 NM NM (Note 3)
NM
John Daniel Rice 3/4 NM NM NM NM
Independent Non-Executive Directors
Yeo Teng Yang 4/4 4/4 4/4 1/1 NM
Leong Horn Kee 4/4 NM 4/4 1/1 NM
Tay Kah Chye 4/4 4/4 NM NM 1/1
Kwah Thiam Hock 4/4 4/4 NM 1/1 1/1
Note 1 – Mr Chua Phuay Hee retired from the Company on 31 December 2011.
Note 2 – Mr Lee Hock Kuan retired from the Company on 31 March 2011.
Note 3 – Mr Kuok Khoon Ean was unable to attend the meeting due to a prior engagement.
NM – Refers to Board members who are non-committee members but who have been invited to attend these meetings (except for Remuneration Committee meetings where the CEO is the
only non-committee member in attendance).

corporate
governance
As part of the Company’s continuing efforts to update its PRINCIPLE 3
Directors on changes to the regulatory environment, Directors are Chairman and Chief Executive Officer
encouraged to attend relevant seminars and courses which are paid The Chairman and CEO, Mr Kuok Khoon Hong, provides leadership
for by the Company. Regular updates on proposed and ongoing to the Group and is instrumental in transforming the organisation
core business projects are presented at Board meetings to enable into one of Asia’s largest agribusiness groups. Mr Kuok is overall in
the Board to deliberate and contribute effectively to the business charge of the management and strategic direction of the Group.
strategies of the Group. In addition, the Company organises on- All strategic and major decisions made by him are reviewed and
site visits for Non-Executive Directors to familiarise them with approved by the Board.
the operations of the various business divisions in key areas of
operations. Newly appointed Directors are provided with guidance The Chairman and CEO leads all Board meetings and sets the
notes setting out their duties and obligations. agenda. He ensures that Board members receive accurate and
timely information to enable them to be fully cognisant of the affairs
of the Group. He also fosters effective communication and solicits
PRINCIPLE 2 contributions from the Board members to facilitate constructive
Board Composition and Guidance discussions.
The Board presently has 10 members comprising three Executive
Directors and seven Non-Executive Directors. Out of the total of 10 The role of the Chairman and CEO is not separate as there is
Directors, four (representing more than one-third of the total Board adequate accountability and transparency reflected by internal
composition) of these Directors are considered “Independent” controls established within the Group. The single leadership
based on the guidelines under the Code. According to the Code, arrangement ensures that the decision-making process for seizing
an Independent Director is one who has no relationship with good growth prospects for the Group would not be unnecessarily
the Group, which would otherwise interfere with the exercise impeded. With Mr Yeo Teng Yang as the Lead Independent Director,
of independent judgment of the Group’s affairs. The Board is of who avails himself to address shareholders’ concerns and acts as
the view that it is able to exercise independent judgment on the a counter-balance in the decision-making process, the Board is of
Group’s business operations and provide Management with an the opinion that there is sufficient independence in its exercise of
objective perspective on business issues. objective judgment on business affairs of the Group.
The Board is made up of Directors with a wide range of skills,

experience and qualifications and they bring with them expertise PRINCIPLE 4
and knowledge in areas such as accounting, finance, business Board Membership
management, specific industry knowledge relevant to the Group’s The principal functions of the NC are as follows:
business. Key information about the Directors is presented in the
section entitled “Board of Directors” in this annual report. 1. To review nominations of new Director appointments based on
selection criterion such as the incumbent’s credentials and his
The composition and the effectiveness of the Board are reviewed skills and contributions required by the Company.
on an annual basis by the NC to ensure that there is an appropriate 2. To review and recommend to the Board the re-nomination
mix of expertise and experience for the Board to effectively of Directors in accordance with the Company’s Articles of
discharge its duties. Association.
The Board collectively views that its current size complies with the 3. To determine annually whether a Director is “Independent”, in
Code and is effective. The Board will review, from time to time, the need accordance with the guidelines contained in the Code.
to revise its size and composition taking into consideration further 4. To decide whether a Director is able to and has adequately
expansion of the Group’s business and will determine the impact of the carried out his duties as a Director of the Company, in particular,
effectiveness of any proposed change on its current size. whether the Directors concerned have multiple board
representations or if any of these multiple directorships are in
conflict with the interests of the Company.
5. To decide how the Board’s performance may be evaluated and
to propose objective performance criteria.

Appointments of new Directors are deliberated and approved by Although the Directors are not evaluated individually, the factors
the Board based on the recommendations of the NC. taken into consideration with regard to the re-nomination of
Directors for the current year include their attendance and
In accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, one-third contributions made at these meetings.
of the Directors who have been longest in office since their last re-
election, are required to retire by rotation at least once every three
PRINCIPLE 6
years. These Directors are eligible for re-election subject to approval
Access to Information
by the shareholders at the annual general meeting (“AGM”). New
The Board is kept informed by Management of all material events
Directors will hold office only until the next AGM following their
and transactions as and when they occur. Analysts’ and media
appointments and they will be eligible for re-election. Such
reports on the Group are forwarded to the Directors on an ongoing
Directors are not taken into account in determining the number of
basis. The Board has separate, independent and unrestricted access
Directors who are to retire by rotation.
to Management of the Group at all times. Requests for information
from the Board are dealt with promptly by Management.
Messrs Kuok Khoon Hong, Leong Horn Kee and Tay Kah Chye,
who are retiring by rotation in accordance with Article 99 of the
The Board is provided with complete, adequate and timely
Company’s Articles of Association, and Mr Yeo Teng Yang, who is
information prior to Board Meetings. The Company Secretaries
subject to annual re-appointment pursuant to section 153 of the
attend all Board and Board Committee meetings and are
Singapore Companies Act, have been nominated for re-election at
responsible to ensure that established procedures and all relevant
the forthcoming AGM.
statutes and regulations that are applicable to the Company are
complied with. The Company Secretaries work together with the
The NC has reviewed the independence of the four Directors,
respective divisions of the Company to ensure that the Company
namely Messrs Yeo Teng Yang, Leong Horn Kee, Tay Kah Chye and
complies with all relevant rules and regulations.
Kwah Thiam Hock, and is satisfied that there is nothing that would
affect their roles as Independent Directors.
The NC is of the view that although some Directors hold other PRINCIPLE 7
non-Group Board representations, they are nevertheless able to Procedures for Developing
carry and have effectively carried out their duties as Directors of Remuneration Policies
the Company. The RC is set up to assist the Board to ensure that competitive
remuneration policies and practices are in place to attract,
motivate and retain talented executives and to administer and
PRINCIPLE 5 review the Company’s share option plans. The members review and
recommend to the Board remuneration policies and packages for
Board Performance
the Directors and key executives of the Group. Recommendations
The NC has in place, a process for the evaluation of the Board’s
are then submitted to the Board for endorsement. No Director is
effectiveness as a whole. The evaluation is done through written
involved in deciding his own remuneration.
assessments by individual directors. The objective of the annual
evaluation is to identify areas for improvement to implement
In discharging their duties, the RC members have access to advice
appropriate actions. In appraising the Board’s effectiveness,
from the Human Resource department and external advisors,
the assessment is based on factors including the Board’s
whenever necessary. Industry practices and norms are taken into
understanding of the Group’s business operations, development
consideration to ensure that the remuneration packages remain
of strategic directions and the effectiveness of Board meetings to
competitive.
facilitate discussion and decision on critical and major corporate
matters. The collated findings are reported and recommendations
The RC is chaired by Mr Kwah Thiam Hock and its members are Mr
are submitted to the Board for review and further enhancement
Yeo Teng Yang, Mr Leong Horn Kee and Mr Kuok Khoon Ean. Mr
of the Board’s effectiveness. Performance criteria such as key
Kuok Khoon Ean is a Non-Executive Director while the Chairman
performance indicators of the Company as well as a benchmark
and the other members of the RC are Independent Directors.
index of its industry peers are reviewed on a quarterly basis, while
the Company’s share price performance vis-à-vis the Singapore
Straits Times Index is reviewed from time to time.

corporate
governance
PRINCIPLE 8 Fee Structure
Level and Mix of Remuneration a. A single base fee of S$70,000 for serving as Non-Executive
In making its recommendations to the Board on the level and mix Director or Independent Director.
of remuneration, the RC strives to be competitive, linking rewards
with performance. It takes into consideration the essential b. Additional fee of S$20,000 for serving as Lead Independent
factors to attract, retain and motivate the Directors and senior Director.
management needed to run the Company successfully, linking c. Additional fee for serving as Chairman/Member on the following
rewards to corporate and individual performance, and aligning Board committees:
their interest with those of the shareholders.
Chairman’s fee (S$)
Staff remuneration comprises a fixed and a variable component, Audit Committee 20,000
the latter of which is in the form of bonus linked to the performance Risk Management Committee 20,000
of the individual as well as the Company. In addition, short-term Remuneration Committee 10,000
and long-term incentives, such as the Company’s share option Nominating Committee 10,000
scheme, are in place to strengthen the pay-for-performance
framework by rewarding and recognising the key executives’ Member’s fee (S$)
contributions to the growth of the Company. Audit Committee 5,000
Risk Management Committee 5,000
These benefits aim to directly align the interests of Directors, Remuneration Committee 5,000
senior management and key executives with the interests of Nominating Committee 5,000
shareholders, to improve performance and achieve sustainable
growth for the Company in the ever-changing business A review of Directors’ fees, which takes into account Directors’
environment, and to foster a sense of greater ownership amongst contributions and their respective responsibilities, including
senior management and key executives. attendance and time spent at Board meetings and various
Board Committee meetings, was undertaken. Such fees were
Non-Executive Directors and Independent Directors of the benchmarked against the amounts paid by other major listed
Company do not receive any salary. They receive annual Directors’ companies.
fees, which are subject to the approval of shareholders at the
AGM. The structure of Directors’ fees for the financial year ended No employee of the Group who is an immediate family member
31 December 2011 is as follows. of a Director was paid a remuneration that exceeded S$150,000
during the financial year ended 31 December 2011.

PRINCIPLE 9
Disclosure on Remuneration
Name of Directors Director’s Salary Benefits Amortisation of Variable Total Remuneration Band
Fee Share Option Bonus
Expenses*
Executive Directors
Kuok Khoon Hong Nil 17% 2% 6% 75% 100% S$4,000,000 to S$4,250,000
Martua Sitorus Nil 18% 1% 5% 76% 100% S$3,500,000 to S$3,750,000
Lee Hock Kuan** Nil 5% – 18% 77% 100% S$3,250,000 to S$3,500,000
Teo Kim Yong Nil 23% 1% 28% 48% 100% S$2,000,000 to S$2,250,000
Chua Phuay Hee Nil 25% 1% 30% 44% 100% S$2,000,000 to S$2,250,000
Non-Executive Directors
Kuok Khoon Ean 36% – – 64% – – S$250,000 and below
John Daniel Rice 35% – – 65% – – S$250,000 and below
Kuok Khoon Chen 46% – – 54% – – S$200,000 and below
Independent Non-Executive Directors
Yeo Teng Yang 42% – – 58% – 100% S$300,000 and below
Leong Horn Kee 38% – – 62% – 100% S$250,000 and below
Tay Kah Chye 42% – – 58% – 100% S$250,000 and below
Kwah Thiam Hock 42% – – 58% – 100% S$250,000 and below
Top 5 Key Executives
Goh Ing Sing Nil 25% – 26% 49% 100% S$1,250,000 to S$1,500,000
Matthew John Morgenroth Nil 32% 5% 26% 37% 100% S$1,250,000 to S$1,500,000
Yee Chek Toong Nil 31% 1% 19% 49% 100% S$1,250,000 to S$1,500,000
Rahul Kale Nil 42% – 14% 44% 100% S$1,000,000 to S$1,250,000
Kenny Beh Hang Chwee Nil 37% – 22% 41% 100% S$750,000 to S$1,000,000
* The fair values of the options granted under the Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2000 and Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009, are estimated at the respective grant
dates using trinomial option pricing in the Bloomberg Executive Option Valuation Module and binomial options pricing model respectively.
** Mr Lee Hock Kuan retired on 31 March 2011. His remuneration includes a gratuity for his 28 years of service with the Group.

corporate
governance
PRINCIPLE 10 shareholder, holding company, parent company or controlling
Accountability of the Board and enterprise with internal audit staff;
Management • To review the scope and results of the internal audit procedures;
The Board is responsible to shareholders, the public and the
• To ensure the adequacy of the internal audit function at all
regulatory authorities in providing a balanced and comprehensive
times;
assessment of the Company’s performance and prospects.
Management provides the Board with management reports • To ensure that a review of the effectiveness of the Company’s
and accounts of the Group’s performance, financial position and material internal controls, including financial, operational
prospects on a quarterly basis. Both the Board and Management and compliance controls and risk management is conducted
continually strive towards maximising sustainable value to the annually;
shareholders of the Company.
• To review Interested Person Transactions; and
• To meet with the external and internal auditors without the
PRINCIPLE 11 presence of Management at least once a year.
Audit Committee
The operations of the AC are regulated by its charter. In addition, The AC has explicit authority to investigate any matters within
the AC also adheres to the guidelines as set out in the “Guidebook the scope of its duties and is empowered to obtain independent
for Audit Committees in Singapore” issued in 2008. The Board professional advice. It has been given full access to and co-
is satisfied that the members of the AC have the requisite operation by Management and reasonable resources to discharge
qualifications as well as sufficient expertise and experience to its duties properly. It has full discretion to invite other Directors or
discharge their duties competently. executives to attend its meetings.
The members of the AC perform the following functions: During the last financial year, the AC met four times to review, inter
alia, the following:
• To review the criteria for the appointment of a professional
public accounting firm as the external auditors to the • The financial statements of the Company and the Group
Company; before each of the announcements of the Company’s quarterly
results. During the process, the AC reviewed, among other
• To review with the external auditors, their evaluation of the things, the key areas of management judgment applied for
system of internal accounting controls; adequate provision and disclosure, critical accounting policies
• To review and approve the scope and results of the external and any significant changes made that would have an impact
audit, its cost effectiveness and the independence and on the financial statements;
objectivity of the external auditors; • The external auditors’ plans for the purpose of discussing
• To review with the external auditors, their audit report, the scope of the audit and reporting obligations before
findings and recommendations. Where the external auditors the audit commences. All significant audit findings and
also supply a substantial volume of non-audit services to the recommendations made by the external auditors were
Company, to review the nature and extent of such services to discussed, and where appropriate, implementation of such
maintain the independence of the auditors; recommendations were followed up with Management;
• To review and approve the financial statements of the • The independence and objectivity of the external auditors
Company and the consolidated financial statements of the through discussions with the external auditors as well as
Group for submission to the Board of Directors for approval; reviewing the nature and volume of non-audit services
provided by them. The AC is satisfied that such services do not
• To review the assistance given by the Company’s officers to affect the independence or objectivity of the external auditors;
the external auditors;
• The internal audit findings raised by the internal auditors.
• To nominate external auditors for re-appointment; During the process, material non-compliance and internal
• To ensure that the internal audit function is adequately control weaknesses were reviewed and discussed. The AC
resourced and has appropriate standing within the Group. ensured that appropriate follow-up actions had been taken
For the avoidance of doubt, the internal audit function can regularly with Management on outstanding internal audit
be discharged either in-house, outsourced to a reputable issues; and
accounting/auditing third-party firm or performed by a major

• The reporting on Interested Person Transactions to ensure that PRINCIPLES 14 & 15
established procedures for monitoring of Interested Person Communication with Shareholders
Transactions have been complied with. These transactions are The Board’s policy is that all shareholders should be promptly
reviewed quarterly with the internal auditors and annually with informed of all major developments affecting the Group. The
the external auditors. The AC is satisfied that the guidelines Company engages in communication with shareholders and
and review procedures established to monitor Interested the investment community through its Investor Relations and
Person Transactions have been complied with. Corporate Communications departments.
The AC has recommended to the Board the re-appointment of Ernst The AGM is the main forum for dialogue with shareholders and they
& Young LLP, a firm registered with the Accounting and Corporate are encouraged to meet with the Board and senior management so
Regulatory Authority, as the Company’s external auditors at the as to have a greater insight into the Group’s operations. Shareholders
forthcoming AGM. who hold shares through nominees are allowed, upon prior request
through their nominees, to attend the AGM as proxies without
being constrained by the two-proxy rule.
PRINCIPLES 12 & 13
Internal Controls and Audit The Company also communicates through holding formal media
Reporting to the AC, the Internal Audit department carries out and analysts’ briefings of the Group’s quarterly results, chaired by
internal audit reviews and performs checks and compliance tests the Chairman and CEO, together with Executive Directors and
of the Group’s systems of internal controls, including financial key Management members. Briefing materials are disseminated
and operational controls and risk management. Audit work is through announcements to the SGX-ST.
prioritised and scoped according to an assessment of the different
risk exposures, including financial, operational and technology risk. Shareholders and the public can access the Company ’s
Ad-hoc reviews are also conducted on areas of concern identified announcements, media releases, presentation materials used at
by Management and the AC. briefings and other corporate information posted on its official
website www.wilmar-international.com.
The Internal Audit department, headed by Mr Patrick Tan, meets
the Standards for the Professional Practice of Internal Auditing of
the Institute of Internal Auditors. The department has unrestricted DEALINGS IN SECURITIES
access to all records, properties, functions and co-operation from The Group has in place procedures for prohibiting dealings in the
Management and staff, as necessary, to effectively discharge its Company’s shares by all staff while in possession of price-sensitive
responsibilities and is independent of the activities it audits. information and during the period commencing two weeks prior
to the announcement of the Company’s quarterly results and
The Board and the AC have reviewed the adequacy of the Group’s one month prior to the announcement of the Company’s full year
internal controls that address the Group’s financial, operational results. Directors and employees are reminded to avoid dealing in
and compliance risks. Based on the review conducted, the Board the Company’s shares on short-term considerations and to observe
and AC are of the opinion that in the absence of any evidence to insider trading laws at all times, even when dealing in securities
the contrary, the systems of internal controls in place are adequate during the permitted trading period.
in meeting the current scope of the Group’s business operations.
The Board notes that no system of internal control can provide
absolute assurance against the occurrence of material errors, poor
judgment in decision-making, human error, losses, fraud or other
irregularities.

corporate
governance
INTERESTED PERSON TRANSACTIONS
The Group has established a procedure for recording and reporting Interested Person Transactions. Details of significant interested person
transactions for the year ended 31 December 2011 are set out below:
Name of Interested Person Aggregate value of all Interested Person Aggregate value of all Interested
Transactions during the financial year Person Transactions conducted under
under review (excluding transactions shareholders’ mandate pursuant to Rule
less than S$100,000 and transactions 920 (excluding transactions less than
conducted under shareholders’ mandate S$100,000)
pursuant to Rule 920)
2011 2011
US$’000 US$’000
Archer Daniels Midland Group NIL 4,360,850
Associates of Kuok Khoon Hong & NIL 9,959
Martua Sitorus
Kuok Khoon Ean’s Associates# 290,817 32,739
Martua Sitorus’ Associates NIL 79,508
Kuok Khoon Hong’s Associates NIL 1,447
PPB Group Berhad 240,974 NIL
Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad 3,661 124
#
The IP associates for Mr Kuok Khoon Chen and Mr Kuok Khoon Ean are substantially the same, and are not disclosed separately to avoid duplication.
MATERIAL CONTRACTS
During the financial year, there were no material contracts entered into by the Company or any of its subsidiaries involving the interests
of any director or a controlling shareholder of the Company except those announced via SGXNET from time to time in compliance with
the SGX-ST Listing Manual.
Save as mentioned above, there are no other material contracts entered into by the Company or any of its subsidiaries involving the
interest of the CEO, Director or controlling shareholder, which are either subsisting at the end of the financial year ended 31 December
2011 or, if not then subsisting, entered into since the end of the previous financial year ended 31 December 2010.

financial
report
58 Financial Review
63 Directors' Report
71 Statement by Directors
72 Independent Auditors' Report
74 Consolidated Income Statement
75 Consolidated Statement of
Comprehensive Income
76 Balance Sheets
78 Statements of Changes in Equity
81 Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
83 Notes to the Financial Statements
172 Statistics of Shareholdings
174 Notice of Annual General Meeting
Proxy Form

FINANCIAL REVIEW
CAPITAL STRUCTURE
Wilmar maintains an efficient capital structure to support our business operation and maximise returns to shareholders while preserving our
balance sheet strength. Given the nature of our business, we require a high level of financing to fund our working capital requirements. The
level of funding fluctuates in accordance with prices of agricultural commodities and business volume.
In FY2011, working capital requirements were quite stable, contributing to the Group’s positive cash flows from operating activities. Together
with proceeds from loans and borrowings, we continued to invest in property, plant and equipment, subsidiaries, associates and other
deposits placed with financial institutions. Our balance sheet and capital structure remained strong throughout the period.
Shareholders’ funds of the Group increased by US$1.5 billion to US$13.4 billion while total loans and borrowings were up US$3.5 billion to
US$20.9 billion as at 31 December 2011. Loans and borrowings net of cash and other bank deposits, was US$2.4 billion higher at US$13.0 billion.
Net debt to equity ratio increased but remained healthy at 0.97x as at 31 December 2011, up from 0.90x a year ago. Interest cover, while
lower in line with increased borrowings and borrowing cost, was still at a comfortable level of 7.3x (FY2010: 23.0x).
As mentioned, a large proportion of our borrowings is used for working capital financing. Our working capital comprises very liquid or
near cash assets like inventories and trade receivables. Inventories are primarily agricultural commodities with a ready market, while trade
receivables have short turnover period and are substantially supported by documentary credit. Hence, after adjusting the net debt level for
liquid working capital, our net debt to equity ratio would be much lower at 0.47x.
As at 31 December 2011 2010

US$ million US$ million
Restated*
Shareholders' funds 13,370.2 11,855.8

Net loans and borrowings 12,990.6 10,637.4
Net debt to equity 0.97x 0.90x
Liquid working capital:

Inventories (excluding consumables) 6,905.0 6,334.3
Trade receivables 3,502.9 3,118.6
Less: Current liabilities (excluding loans and borrowings) (3,720.7) (3,386.8)
6,687.2 6,066.1
Net loans and borrowings (excluding liquid working capital) 6,303.4 4,571.3
Adjusted net debt to equity 0.47x 0.39x
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year’s figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition of Sucrogen Limited
and its subsidiaries.

FINANCIAL REVIEW
CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND TREASURY POLICIES

Borrowings
The Group’s total loans and borrowings of US$20.9 billion comprised:

Short term 18,409.0 14,903.6

Long term 2,479.9 2,521.6
20,888.9 17,425.2
During the year, the Group’s short term loans and borrowings increased by US$3.5 billion. More than 80% of short term loans and borrowings
were trade financing lines with minimal refinancing risks as they are backed by inventories and receivables and are self-liquidating. Long
term loans and borrowings were committed loans, due from 2013 onwards.
The majority of the Group’s loans and borrowings were denominated in United States Dollar (US$) while the balance represented borrowings
in the local currencies of the countries where we operate. These currencies consisted mainly of Chinese Renminbi (RMB), Indonesian Rupiah
(IDR), Malaysian Ringgit (MYR) and Australian Dollar (AUD).
With the exception of the zero-coupon convertible bonds of US$558.4 million (31 December 2010: US$545.7 million), our loans and
borrowings were predominantly on floating rates.
In January 2012, under a Guaranteed Medium Term Note Programme established on 28 December 2011, the Group issued S$250.0 million
3.5% Notes due 2017 and S$100.0 million 4.1% Notes due 2019. The programme enables us to diversify our funding sources and to meet
our medium-term funding requirements.
Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents were held in US$ and the local currencies of the respective countries where we operate, mainly RMB, IDR and MYR.
As at 31 December 2011, our cash and cash equivalents comprised:

Total cash and bank balances 7,898.4 6,787.8

Less: Fixed deposits pledged for bank facilities (6,441.1) (5,707.9)
Less: Other deposits with maturity of more than 3 months (80.5) (187.4)
Less: Bank overdrafts (97.1) (492.0)
Cash and cash equivalents 1,279.7 400.5
The increase in deposits pledged for bank facilities was in line with the Group's increased loans and borrowings.

FINANCIAL REVIEW
Financial risk management

Wilmar operates in several countries and is exposed to a variety of financial risks including credit risk, liquidity risk, interest rate risk, foreign
currency risk, commodity price risk and market price risk. Risk management is discussed in greater detail in the Risk Management section
and Notes to the Financial Statements, and is summarised as follows:
Credit risk. The majority of the Group’s export sales require documentary credit from customers. Our domestic sales are executed on
•
cash terms or where appropriate, credit terms are granted. We conduct thorough credit assessment before granting credit terms and
limits, which are then monitored closely for adherence. The terms and limits are reviewed periodically and revised where necessary,
taking into account customers’ credit worthiness and market conditions.
Liquidity risk. The Group maintains sufficient liquidity by closely monitoring our cash flow and maintaining sufficient credit facilities,
•
including the use of trade finance for the Group’s raw material purchases. The Group also aims at maintaining flexibility in funding by
keeping credit facilities available with different banks.
Interest rate risk. The Group has minimal exposure to interest rate risk as most of our loans and borrowings are short term and trade
•
related, with interest costs typically priced into our products and passed on to customers. For long-term borrowings, the Group may
use financial instruments such as interest rate swaps to hedge or minimise our interest rate risk.
Foreign currency risk. Currency risk arises as entities in the Group regularly transact or borrow in currencies other than their
•
respective functional currencies, including US$, RMB, IDR, MYR and AUD. We seek to manage our currency risk by constructing natural
hedges where we match sales and purchases in the same currency or through financial instruments, such as foreign currency forward
contracts. The Group is also exposed to currency translation risk arising from its net investments in foreign operations, which are not
hedged as these currency positions are considered long-term in nature.
Commodity price risk. The prices of agricultural commodities can be very volatile, exposing the Group to commodity price risk as
•
our sale and purchase commitments do not normally match at the end of each business day. The Group uses forward physical and/or
derivative contracts to mitigate such risk.
Market price risk. Market price risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of the Group’s financial instruments will fluctuate
•
because of changes in market prices (other than commodity price, interest or exchange rates). The Group is exposed to equity price
risk arising from its investment in quoted equity instruments. These instruments are classified as held for trading or available-for-sale
financial assets.

FINANCIAL REVIEW
CASH FLOW, FUNDING AND LIQUIDITY

Cash flow
Net cash flows generated from operating activities for FY2011 was US$1.9 billion compared to an outflow of US$2.3 billion in FY2010.
The inflow for FY2011 resulted from higher earnings as well as a more stable working capital requirement on the back of lower prices of
agricultural commodities towards year end compared to a year ago.
FY2011 FY2010
Net cash flows generated from/(used in) operating activities 1,947.7 (2,318.8)
Net cash flows used in investing activities (2,068.2) (2,628.9)
Net cash flows generated from financing activities 999.7 4,955.9
Net increase in cash held 879.2 8.2
Turnover days:
Inventory 64 60
Trade receivables 28 28
Trade payables 12 12
Note: Turnover days for the current and preceding financial years are now calculated by averaging the monthly turnover days. Monthly turnover days are computed using revenue and
cost of sales for the month. In the past, turnover days were calculated based on year-to-date revenue and cost of sales. The change is made to better reflect the true turnover period
in view of the seasonality of the Group’s business.
Other major applications and source of funds in FY2011 were as follows:
• Approximately US$2.1 billion was used in investing activities, of which US$1.6 billion was applied towards plantations development,
property, plant and equipment and US$355.8 million for investment in subsidiaries and associates.
Major additions of property, plant and equipment during the year included crushing plants, edible oils refineries, flour and rice mills,
and oleochemicals plants in China; edible oils refineries, oleochemicals plant and palm oil mills in Indonesia; and the construction
of vessels.
• US$1.0 billion was generated from financing activities. Included in here was net proceeds of US$3.0 billion (net of increase in fixed
deposits pledged with financial institutions for bank facilities) raised from loans and borrowings. Uses of funds included US$1.7 billion
placed as other deposits with financial institutions and US$279.8 million for the payment of dividends to the shareholders of
the Company.

FINANCIAL REVIEW
Funding and liquidity

At the end of FY2011, credit facilities in the form of short term loans, trade finance and committed loans available to the Group added up to
approximately US$31.0 billion, of which US$20.9 billion was utilised. The unutilised facilities, together with the Group’s US$1.3 billion available
cash and cash equivalents, brought the Group’s total liquidity to approximately US$11.4 billion as at 31 December 2011.
The Group’s US$2.6 billion of term loans and convertible bonds due for repayment in FY2012 and an estimated US$1.5 billion of capital
expenditure for FY2012, are expected to be met by internal resources and loans and borrowings.
Operationally, assuming no major movements in the prices of agricultural commodities, our funding requirements coincide with the
seasonality of sales. Typically, the third quarter of the year is the seasonal peak in terms of sales volume. The additional funding requirements
for that quarter should be met by the Group’s healthy liquidity position.
SHAREHOLDERS’ RETURNS AND SHARE BUY-BACKS

For FY2011, the Board of Directors has proposed a final dividend of 3.1 Singapore cents per share. Together with the interim dividend of 3.0
Singapore cents per share paid on 14 September 2011, total dividend for FY2011 will amount to 6.1 Singapore cents per share or a payout
ratio of approximately 20% of net profit. Barring any unforeseen circumstances, the Group expects to maintain a dividend payout ratio of
approximately 20%.
Currently, Wilmar has a share buy-back mandate which will be expiring on 27 April 2012, being the date of the forthcoming Annual General
Meeting. Shareholders’ approval for the proposed renewal of the mandate will be sought at an Extraordinary General Meeting on the same
date. Share purchases would be made only when it is in the best interests of the Company and in appropriate circumstances which will not
materially and adversely affect the liquidity and orderly trading of the Company’s shares, including the working capital requirements and
gearing level of the Group.
To date, no shares have been purchased under the mandate.
ACCOUNTING POLICIES
The Group’s financial statements have been prepared in accordance with Singapore Financial Reporting Standards (FRS). The preparation of
financial statements requires management to exercise judgement and to use estimates and assumptions. Significant accounting judgement,
estimates and assumptions, which are discussed in greater detail in the Notes to the Financial Statements, include:
• Assessment for impairment of goodwill and brand which requires an estimate of the expected future cash flows from the
cash-generating unit and a suitable discount rate for present value calculation.
• Depreciation of plant and equipment which is based on management estimates of their useful lives. Changes in the expected level
of usage and technological developments could impact the economic useful lives and the residual values of these assets. Therefore,
future depreciation charges could be revised.
• Provision for income taxes involves significant judgement as there are transactions and computations for which the ultimate tax
determination is uncertain during the ordinary course of business. Where the final tax outcome is different, such differences will
impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which such determination is made.
• Biological assets, which are stated at fair value less point-of-sale costs, are estimated by reference to an independent valuer’s assessment.
Changes in the conditions of the biological assets could impact the fair value of these assets.

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
The directors are pleased to present their report to the members together with the audited consolidated financial statements of Wilmar
International Limited ("the Company" or “Wilmar”) and its subsidiaries (collectively, "the Group") and the balance sheet and statement of
changes in equity of the Company for the financial year ended 31 December 2011.
DIRECTORS
The directors of the Company in office at the date of this report are:
Kuok Khoon Hong

Martua Sitorus
Teo Kim Yong
Kuok Khoon Chen
Kuok Khoon Ean
John Daniel Rice
Yeo Teng Yang
Leong Horn Kee
Tay Kah Chye
Kwah Thiam Hock
ARRANGEMENTS TO ENABLE DIRECTORS TO ACQUIRE SHARES AND DEBENTURES

Except as disclosed in this report, neither at the end of nor at any time during the financial year, was the Company a party to any arrangement
whose objects are, or one of whose object is, to enable the directors of the Company to acquire benefits by means of the acquisition of
shares or debentures of the Company or any other body corporate.

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS IN SHARES, SHARE OPTIONS, CONVERTIBLE SECURITIES AND DEBENTURES

The following directors, who held office at the end of the financial year, had, according to the register of directors’ shareholdings required
to be kept under Section 164 of the Singapore Companies Act, Cap. 50, interest in shares, share options and convertible securities of the
Company and its related corporations (other than wholly-owned subsidiaries) as stated below:
Direct Interest Deemed Interest

As at As at As at As at As at As at
1.1.11 31.12.11 21.1.12 1.1.11 31.12.11 21.1.12
Company
(Ordinary Shares)
Kuok Khoon Hong – 500,000 500,000 762,967,168 763,467,168 763,467,168

Martua Sitorus 4,338,000 4,988,000 4,988,000 641,321,242 646,321,242 646,321,242
Chua Phuay Hee* 3,123,881 3,373,881 3,373,881 2,000,000 2,000,000 2,000,000
Teo Kim Yong 12,089,766 – – 20,492,508 33,852,274 33,852,274
Kuok Khoon Chen – – – 11,693,156 11,693,156 11,693,156
Kuok Khoon Ean – – – 486,400 486,400 486,400
Yeo Teng Yang – 100,000 100,000 – – –
Leong Horn Kee 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
Tay Kah Chye 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
Kwah Thiam Hock 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
(Share options exercisable at S$4.50 per share)
Kuok Khoon Hong 1,000,000 500,000 500,000 – – –

Martua Sitorus 800,000 400,000 400,000 – – –
Chua Phuay Hee* 500,000 250,000 250,000 – – –
Teo Kim Yong 500,000 250,000 250,000 – – –
Kuok Khoon Ean 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
John Daniel Rice 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
Yeo Teng Yang 250,000 150,000 150,000 – – –
Leong Horn Kee 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
Tay Kah Chye 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
Kwah Thiam Hock 100,000 100,000 100,000 – – –
* Mr Chua Phuay Hee retired as a Director of the Company on 31 December 2011

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
DIRECTORS’ INTERESTS IN SHARES, SHARE OPTIONS, CONVERTIBLE SECURITIES AND DEBENTURES

(CONTINUED)
Direct Interest Deemed Interest
As at As at As at As at As at As at
1.1.11 31.12.11 21.1.12 1.1.11 31.12.11 21.1.12
Company
(Share options exercisable at S$6.68 per share)
Chua Phuay Hee* 500,000 500,000 500,000 – – –

Teo Kim Yong 500,000 500,000 500,000 – – –
Kuok Khoon Chen 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
Kuok Khoon Ean 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
John Daniel Rice 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
Yeo Teng Yang 250,000 250,000 250,000 – – –
Leong Horn Kee 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
Tay Kah Chye 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –
Kwah Thiam Hock 200,000 200,000 200,000 – – –

(US$600,000,000 Convertible bonds due 2012) (US$)
Kuok Khoon Hong – – – 2,500,000 2,500,000 2,500,000

Martua Sitorus 1,000,000 1,000,000 1,000,000 – – –
Except as disclosed in this report, no director who held office at the end of the financial year, had interests in shares, convertible securities,
share options, warrants or debentures of the Company, or of related corporations, either at the beginning of the financial year or at the end
of the financial year.
DIRECTORS’ CONTRACTUAL BENEFITS

Except as disclosed in this report and in the financial statements, since the end of the previous financial year, no director of the Company,
who held office at the end of the financial year, has received or become entitled to receive a benefit by reason of a contract made by the
Company or a related corporation with the director, or with a firm of which the director is a member, or with a company in which the director
has a substantial financial interest.

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
SHARE OPTION SCHEMES

Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2000 (“Wilmar ESOS 2000”)
The Wilmar ESOS 2000 which was approved by shareholders of the Company on 30 June 2000, was terminated on 29 April 2009 following
the adoption of a new share option scheme. A total of 18,170,000 shares were granted pursuant to the Wilmar ESOS 2000 to executives of
the Group on 27 November 2008 and 9 December 2008 at the relevant Market Price as defined in the aforesaid scheme. No options were
granted to directors or controlling shareholders (and their associates) of the Company under the Wilmar ESOS 2000. The options are valid
for a term of five years from the date of grant. The options are exercisable in the following manner: 50% after the 1st anniversary of the
date of grant and the remaining 50% are exercisable after the 2nd anniversary of the date of grant. Outstanding options granted under the
Wilmar ESOS 2000 remain valid until the respective expiry dates of the options. As at 31 December 2011, options to subscribe for a total of
4,131,000 shares remained outstanding.
Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009 (“Wilmar ESOS 2009”)

On 29 April 2009, a new share option scheme known as the “Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009“ (“Wilmar ESOS 2009”), the rules
of which were set out in a circular to shareholders dated 2 April 2009, was approved by the shareholders of the Company. This new scheme
was adopted in substitution of the Wilmar ESOS 2000.
Under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, the option entitles eligible participants to subscribe for ordinary shares in the Company at a price equal to the
average of the closing prices of the Company’s shares on the Singapore Exchange Securities Trading Limited (“SGX-ST”) on the five trading
days immediately preceding the date of the grant of the option (“Market Price”) or at a discount to the Market Price (up to a maximum
of 20%).
The maximum number of shares (in respect of the options) that may be granted under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, after taking into account of
(i) the total number of new shares issued and issuable in respect of all other share-based incentive schemes of the Company (including those
under the Wilmar ESOS 2000); and (ii) the number of treasury shares delivered in respect of options granted under all other share-based
incentive schemes of the Company (if any), shall not exceed 15% of the total issued shares (excluding treasury shares) of the Company on
the date immediately preceding the relevant date of grant.
The aggregate number of shares that may be granted to controlling shareholders (and their associates) of the Company shall not exceed
25% of the total number of shares available under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, provided that the number of shares available to each controlling
shareholder or each of his associates shall not exceed 10% of the total number of shares available under the aforesaid scheme.
There is no restriction on the eligibility of any participant to participate in any other share-based incentive schemes implemented by the
Company or any of its subsidiaries or by any associated company or otherwise.
The Wilmar ESOS 2009 is administered by the Remuneration Committee (“RC”). The members of the RC are Mr Kwah Thiam Hock (Chairman),
Mr Kuok Khoon Ean, Mr Yeo Teng Yang and Mr Leong Horn Kee, the majority of whom are independent directors. The RC is authorised to
determine, inter alia, the persons to be granted options, the number of options to be granted, whether the options continue to be valid
in the event of cessation of employment (as provided under the rules of Wilmar ESOS 2009), the exercise price (including any adjustments
thereto) and to recommend modifications to the Wilmar ESOS 2009 (if deemed appropriate).
On 21 May 2009, a total of 4,750,000 shares under option (“option shares”) were granted to all directors (including two directors who were
controlling shareholders) of the Company at Market Price. As at 31 December 2011, the number of unexercised option shares was 2,700,000,
out of which a total 700,000 unexercised option shares held by past directors (including Mr Chua Phuay Hee, who retired on 31 December
2011) continue to be valid as the options were issued in recognition of their contributions at the time of the grant. The options are valid
for a term of five years from the date of grant, of which 50% are exercisable after the 1st anniversary and the remaining 50% after the 2nd
anniversary of the date of the grant.

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
SHARE OPTION SCHEMES (CONTINUED)

Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009 (“Wilmar ESOS 2009”) (continued)
On 10 March 2010, the Company granted options to subscribe for a total of 25,705,000 shares at S$6.68 per share at Market Price to directors
and senior executives. No options were granted to controlling shareholders (and their associates) of the Company. As at 31 December 2011,
the number of shares that were unexercised under this option grant stood at 24,905,000 out of which options to subscribe for a total
1,000,000 shares held by past directors (including Mr Chua Phuay Hee) continue to be valid until the expiry period. The options are valid for
a term of five years from the date of grant and are exercisable in the following manner:
For Executive Directors and Senior Executives
• After 1st anniversary of the date of grant – 33% of options granted

• After 2nd anniversary of the date of grant – 33% of options granted
• After 3rd anniversary of the date of grant – 34% of options granted
For Non-Executive Directors
All options are exercisable after the 1st anniversary of the date of grant.
No options were granted for the financial year ended 31 December 2011.
SHARE OPTIONS EXERCISED

During the financial year, the following shares were issued by the Company by virtue of the exercise of options pursuant to:
Wilmar ESOS 2000:

– 2,993,000 ordinary shares at an exercise price of S$2.45 per share
– 10,000 ordinary shares at an exercise price of S$2.63 per share
Wilmar ESOS 2009:

– 1,500,000 ordinary shares at an exercise price of S$4.50 per share

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
UNISSUED SHARES UNDER OPTION

As at the end of the financial year, unissued ordinary shares of the Company under options were as follows:
No. of
options
granted No. of No. of
As at during options options As at Exercise Exercise
Date of Grant 1.1.11 the year cancelled exercised 31.12.11 Price Period
Wilmar ESOS 2000*
27.11.08 1,278,000 – – (227,500) 1,050,500 S$2.45 28.11.2009 to

26.11.2013
27.11.08 5,771,000 – – (2,765,500) 3,005,500 S$2.45 28.11.2010 to
26.11.2013
09.12.08 25,000 – – – 25,000 S$2.63 10.12.2009 to
08.12.2013
09.12.08 60,000 – – (10,000) 50,000 S$2.63 10.12.2010 to
08.12.2013
Sub–total 7,134,000 – – (3,003,000) 4,131,000
Wilmar ESOS 2009
21.05.09 1,825,000 – – (1,500,000) 325,000 S$4.50 22.5.2010 to

21.5.2014
21.05.09 2,375,000 – – – 2,375,000 S$4.50 22.5.2011 to
21.5.2014
Sub–total 4,200,000 – – (1,500,000) 2,700,000
10.03.10 9,401,350 – (211,200) – 9,190,150 S$6.68 11.3.2011 to

10.3.2015
10.03.10 7,951,350 – (211,200) – 7,740,150 S$6.68 11.3.2012 to
10.3.2015
10.03.10 8,192,300 – (217,600) – 7,974,700 S$6.68 11.3.2013 to
10.3.2015
Sub–total 25,545,000 – (640,000) – 24,905,000
Grand Total 36,879,000 – (640,000) (4,503,000) 31,736,000
* Refer to Note 31 for vesting conditions for various tranches of options granted

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
UNISSUED SHARES UNDER OPTION (CONTINUED)

The information on Directors participating in the Wilmar ESOS 2009 is as follows:
Aggregate Aggregate
options options
granted exercised
since since Aggregate
Aggregate commencement commencement options
options granted of the option of the option outstanding
during the scheme to scheme to as at
Name of Directors financial year 31.12.11 31.12.11 31.12.11
Kuok Khoon Hong – 1,000,000 500,000 500,000

Martua Sitorus – 800,000 400,000 400,000
Chua Phuay Hee* – 1,000,000 250,000 750,000
Teo Kim Yong – 1,000,000 250,000 750,000
Kuok Khoon Chen – 200,000 – 200,000
Kuok Khoon Ean – 400,000 – 400,000
John Daniel Rice – 400,000 – 400,000
Yeo Teng Yang – 500,000 100,000 400,000
Leong Horn Kee – 400,000 100,000 300,000
Tay Kah Chye – 400,000 100,000 300,000
Kwah Thiam Hock – 400,000 100,000 300,000
Total – 6,500,000 1,800,000 4,700,000
E xcept as disclosed above, since the commencement of the Wilmar ESOS 2000^ and Wilmar ESOS 2009 (“Option Schemes”) until the end of
the financial year under review:
• Except for options granted on 21 May 2009 to Mr Kuok Khoon Hong (1,000,000 option shares) and Mr Martua Sitorus (800,000 option
shares) who were controlling shareholders on the date of grant, no options have been granted to controlling shareholders of the
Company and their associates;
• No participant has received 5% or more of the total number of options available under the Option Schemes;
• No options that entitle the holders to participate, by virtue of the options, in any share issue of any other corporation have been
granted;
• No options have been granted to directors and employees of the holding company and its subsidiaries as the Company does not have
a parent company; and
• No options have been granted at a discount.
From 14 July 2006 (completion of reverse takeover)

^

DIRECTORS’ REPORT
AUDIT COMMITTEE
The Audit Committee (“AC”) members at the date of this report are Mr Tay Kah Chye (Chairman), Mr Kwah Thiam Hock and Mr Yeo Teng Yang.
The AC performs the functions specified in Section 201B (5) of the Singapore Companies Act, Cap. 50, the Listing Manual of the Singapore
Exchange Securities Trading Limited (“SGX-ST”), the Singapore Code of Corporate Governance and the Guidebook for Audit Committees in
Singapore issued in 2008.
The principal responsibility of the AC is to assist the Board of Directors in fulfilling its oversight responsibilities. The operations of the AC
are regulated by its charter. The Board is of the opinion that the members of the AC have sufficient accounting, financial and management
expertise and experience to discharge their duties.
Notwithstanding that the Group has appointed different auditors for certain non-significant subsidiaries and associated companies, the
Board and AC are satisfied that such appointments do not compromise the standard and effectiveness of the audit of the Group.
During the year, the AC met four times to review, inter alia, the scope of work and strategies of both the internal and external auditors, and
the results arising therefrom, including their evaluation of the system of internal controls. The AC also reviewed the assistance given by the
Company’s officers to the auditors. The financial statements of the Group and the Company were reviewed by the AC prior to submission to
the directors of the Company for adoption. The AC also met with the external and internal auditors, without the presence of management,
to discuss issues of concern to them.
The AC has, in accordance with Chapter 9 of the Listing Manual of the SGX-ST, reviewed the requirements for approval and disclosure of
interested person transactions, reviewed the procedures set up by the Group and the Company to identify and report and where necessary,
seek approval for interested person transactions and, with the assistance of the internal auditors, reviewed interested person transactions.
The AC was satisfied that proper risk management procedures were in place. It will consider regularly the need to conduct independent risk
management reviews and disclose its decision and the results of such reviews to shareholders and the SGX-ST.
The AC was satisfied with the independence and objectivity of the external auditors and has nominated Ernst & Young LLP for re-appointment
as auditors of the Company at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting.
Further details regarding the AC are disclosed in the Report on Corporate Governance.
AUDITORS
Ernst & Young LLP have expressed their willingness to accept re-appointment as auditors.
On behalf of the Board of Directors
Kuok Khoon Hong Martua Sitorus

Director Director
21 March 2012

STATEMENT BY DIRECTORS
We, Kuok Khoon Hong and Martua Sitorus, being two of the directors of Wilmar International Limited, do hereby state that, in the opinion
of the directors,
(a) the accompanying balance sheets, consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, statements of
changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statement together with notes thereto are drawn up so as to give a true and fair view of
the state of affairs of the Group and of the Company as at 31 December 2011, and the results of the business, changes in equity and
cash flows of the Group and the changes in equity of the Company for the year ended on that date; and
(b) at the date of this statement, there are reasonable grounds to believe that the Company will be able to pay its debts as and when they
fall due.
On behalf of the Board of Directors
Kuok Khoon Hong Martua Sitorus

Director Director
21 March 2012

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
To the Members of Wilmar International Limited
REPORT ON THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

We have audited the accompanying consolidated financial statements of Wilmar International Limited (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries
(collectively, the “Group”) set out on pages 74 to 171, which comprise the balance sheets of the Group and the Company as at 31 December
2011, the statements of changes in equity of the Group and the Company and the consolidated income statement, consolidated statement
of comprehensive income and consolidated cash flow statement of the Group for the year then ended, and a summary of significant
accounting policies and other explanatory information.
MANAGEMENT’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE CONSOLIDATED FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

Management is responsible for the preparation of consolidated financial statements that give a true and fair view in accordance with the
provisions of the Singapore Companies Act, Chapter 50 (the “Act”) and Singapore Financial Reporting Standards, and for devising and
maintaining a system of internal accounting controls sufficient to provide a reasonable assurance that assets are safeguarded against loss
from unauthorised use or disposition; and transactions are properly authorised and that they are recorded as necessary to permit the
preparation of true and fair profit and loss accounts and balance sheets and to maintain accountability of assets.
Auditors’ responsibility
Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We conducted our audit in
accordance with Singapore Standards on Auditing. Those standards require that we comply with ethical requirements and plan and perform
the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free from material misstatement.
An audit involves performing procedures to obtain audit evidence about the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial
statements. The procedures selected depend on the auditor’s judgement, including the assessment of the risks of material misstatement of
the consolidated financial statements, whether due to fraud or error. In making those risk assessments, the auditor considers internal control
relevant to the entity’s preparation of the consolidated financial statements that give a true and fair view in order to design audit procedures
that are appropriate in the circumstances, but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the entity’s internal
control. An audit also includes evaluating the appropriateness of accounting policies used and the reasonableness of accounting estimates
made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements.
We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our audit opinion.

INDEPENDENT AUDITORS’ REPORT
To the Members of Wilmar International Limited
Opinion
In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements of the Group and the balance sheet and statement of changes in equity of the Company
are properly drawn up in accordance with the provisions of the Act and Singapore Financial Reporting Standards so as to give a true and fair
view of the state of affairs of the Group and of the Company as at 31 December 2011 and of the results, changes in equity and cash flows of
the Group and the changes in equity of the Company for the year ended on that date.
report on other legal and regulatory requirements

In our opinion, the accounting and other records required by the Act to be kept by the Company and by those subsidiaries incorporated in
Singapore of which we are the auditors have been properly kept in accordance with the provisions of the Act.
Ernst & Young LLP

Public Accountants and Certified Public Accountants
Singapore
21 March 2012

CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT
For the financial year ended 31 December 2011
Note 2011 2010

US$'000 US$'000
Revenue 4 44,710,034 30,377,524

Cost of sales 5 (40,839,399) (27,870,370)
Gross profit 3,870,635 2,507,154
Other items of income

Net gains arising from changes in fair value of biological assets 262,657 251,017
Interest income 6 246,613 135,352
Other operating income 7 746,303 347,759
Other items of expense

Selling and distribution expenses (1,964,672) (1,136,766)
Administrative expenses (559,841) (341,557)
Other operating expenses 8 (98,378) (64,260)
Finance costs 9 (505,796) (208,126)
Non-operating items 10 (104,035) 115,486
Share of results of associates 185,255 38,127
Profit before tax 10 2,078,741 1,644,186

Income tax expense 11 (379,219) (189,660)
Profit after tax 1,699,522 1,454,526
Attributable to:
Owners of the parent 1,600,840 1,323,974
Non-controlling interests 98,682 130,552
1,699,522 1,454,526
Earnings per share attributable to owners of the parent

(US cents per share)
– Basic 12 25.0 20.7
– Diluted 12 25.0 20.7
The accompanying accounting policies and explanatory notes form an integral part of the financial statements.

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Profit after tax 1,699,522 1,454,526
Other comprehensive income:
Foreign currency translation 97,302 184,473
Fair value adjustment on cash flow hedges 110,391 (225,459)
Fair value adjustment on available-for-sale financial assets (22,663) (4,844)
Share of associates' other comprehensive income – 4
Total other comprehensive income for the year, net of tax 185,030 (45,826)
Total comprehensive income for the year 1,884,552 1,408,700
Attributable to:
Owners of the parent 1,761,398 1,266,573
Non-controlling interests 123,154 142,127
1,884,552 1,408,700

Balance Sheets
As at 31 December 2011
Group Company
Note 2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated *
ASSETS
Non-current assets
Property, plant and equipment 13 7,468,889 6,266,445 1,278 144
Biological assets 14 1,845,982 1,512,209 – –
Plasma investments 8,499 5,418 – –
Intangible assets 15 4,409,939 4,370,939 397 661
Investment in subsidiaries 16 – – 8,697,067 8,680,663
Investment in associates 17 1,578,746 1,263,659 201,698 200,849
Available-for-sale financial assets 18 193,843 143,825 36,000 36,000
Deferred tax assets 19 226,865 205,724 – –
Derivative financial instruments 20 23,660 131,111 – 85,014
Other financial receivables 21 80,101 106,810 129,473 104,854
Other non-financial assets 21 38,504 50,030 – –
15,875,028 14,056,170 9,065,913 9,108,185
Current assets
Inventories 22 7,265,300 6,737,369 – –
Trade receivables 23 3,502,925 3,118,558 – –
Other financial receivables 21 3,156,123 1,315,439 1,791,780 2,893,968
Other non-financial assets 21 1,368,955 1,406,516 1,667 1,286
Derivative financial instruments 20 239,354 350,091 330 –
Available-for-sale financial assets 18 – 3,010 – –
Financial assets held for trading 18 333,715 316,301 – –
Other bank deposits 24 6,521,570 5,895,314 – –
Cash and bank balances 24 1,376,783 892,498 3,243 3,450
23,764,725 20,035,096 1,797,020 2,898,704
TOTAL ASSETS 39,639,753 34,091,266 10,862,933 12,006,889
EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Current liabilities
Trade payables 25 1,710,004 1,447,188 – –
Other financial payables 26 1,131,337 806,014 24,448 588,807
Other non-financial liabilities 26 469,834 393,334 – –
Derivative financial instruments 20 263,402 629,534 – –
Loans and borrowings 27 18,409,070 14,903,631 558,417 508,500
Tax payables 146,086 110,688 760 –
22,129,733 18,290,389 583,625 1,097,307
NET CURRENT ASSETS 1,634,992 1,744,707 1,213,395 1,801,397

and its subsidiaries (Note 15).

Balance Sheets
As at 31 December 2011
Group Company
Note 2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated *
Non-current liabilities
Other financial payables 26 4,691 4,274 – –
Other non-financial liabilities 26 94,612 66,228 – –
Derivative financial instruments 20 43,057 75,234 – –
Loans and borrowings 27 2,479,873 2,521,556 – 545,716
Deferred tax liabilities 19 639,422 527,293 – –
3,261,655 3,194,585 – 545,716
TOTAL LIABILITIES 25,391,388 21,484,974 583,625 1,643,023

NET ASSETS 14,248,365 12,606,292 10,279,308 10,363,866
Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital 28 8,451,521 8,434,768 8,887,660 8,870,907
Retained earnings 6,011,599 4,729,552 1,191,918 1,307,593
Other reserves 29 (1,092,930) (1,308,486) 199,730 185,366
13,370,190 11,855,834 10,279,308 10,363,866
Non-controlling interests 878,175 750,458 – –
TOTAL EQUITY 14,248,365 12,606,292 10,279,308 10,363,866
TOTAL EQUITY AND LIABILITIES 39,639,753 34,091,266 10,862,933 12,006,889
and its subsidiaries (Note 15).

Statements of Changes in Equity
Attributable to owners of the parent

Equity
attributable
to owners of Non–
Share Retained Other the parent, controlling Equity
Note capital earnings reserves total interests total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
2011
GROUP
Opening balance at 1 January 2011 8,434,768 4,729,552 (1,308,486) 11,855,834 750,458 12,606,292
Profit for the year – 1,600,840 – 1,600,840 98,682 1,699,522
Other comprehensive income
for the year – – 160,558 160,558 24,472 185,030
Total comprehensive income
for the year – 1,600,840 160,558 1,761,398 123,154 1,884,552
Grant of equity-settled share options 29(b)(vii) – – 19,964 19,964 – 19,964

Issue of shares pursuant to exercise of
share options 29(b)(vii) 16,753 – (5,600) 11,153 – 11,153
Share capital contributed by
non-controlling shareholders – – – – 35,770 35,770
Dividends on ordinary shares 38 – (279,820) – (279,820) – (279,820)
Dividends paid to non-controlling
shareholders by subsidiaries – – – – (29,075) (29,075)
Net transfer to other reserves – (38,973) 38,973 – – –
Total contributions by and
distributions to owners 16,753 (318,793) 53,337 (248,703) 6,695 (242,008)
Acquisition of subsidiaries – – – – 40,208 40,208

Acquisition of additional interest in
subsidiaries – – – – (42,314) (42,314)
Gain on bargain purchase of additional
interest in subsidiaries – – 1,661 1,661 (26) 1,635
Total changes in ownership interests
in subsidiaries – – 1,661 1,661 (2,132) (471)
Closing balance at 31 December 2011 8,451,521 6,011,599 (1,092,930) 13,370,190 878,175 14,248,365


Equity
attributable
to owners of Non–
Share Retained Other the parent, controlling Equity
Note capital earnings reserves total interests total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
2010
GROUP
Opening balance at 1 January 2010 8,414,355 3,821,552 (1,304,778) 10,931,129 480,500 11,411,629
Profit for the year – 1,323,974 – 1,323,974 130,552 1,454,526
Other comprehensive income
for the year – – (57,401) (57,401) 11,575 (45,826)
Total comprehensive income for the
year – 1,323,974 (57,401) 1,266,573 142,127 1,408,700
Grant of equity-settled share options 29(b)(vii) – – 34,742 34,742 – 34,742

Issue of shares pursuant to exercise of
share options 29(b)(vii) 18,892 – (6,501) 12,391 – 12,391
Issue of shares pursuant to conversion of
convertible bonds 29(b)(i) 1,521 – (198) 1,323 – 1,323
Share capital contributed by non-
controlling shareholders – – – – 25,386 25,386
Dividends on ordinary shares 38 – (384,658) – (384,658) – (384,658)
Dividends paid to non-controlling
shareholders by subsidiaries – – – – (41,722) (41,722)
Net transfer to other reserves – (31,316) 31,316 – – –
Total contributions by and
distributions to owners 20,413 (415,974) 59,359 (336,202) (16,336) (352,538)
Acquisition of subsidiaries, as previously

reported – – – – 101,084 101,084
Finalisation of purchase price allocation – – – – 48,430 48,430
Acquisition of subsidiaries, as restated – – – – 149,514 149,514
Acquisition of additional interest in
subsidiaries – – – – (5,822) (5,822)
Premium paid for acquisition of
additional interest in subsidiaries – – (4,777) (4,777) (5) (4,782)
Disposal of subsidiaries – – – – (409) (409)
Dilution of interest in subsidiaries – – – – 889 889
Loss on dilution of interest in subsidiaries – – (889) (889) – (889)
Total changes in ownership interests
in subsidiaries – – (5,666) (5,666) 144,167 138,501
Closing balance at 31 December 2010 8,434,768 4,729,552 (1,308,486) 11,855,834 750,458 12,606,292


Equity
attributable
to owners of
Share Retained Other the parent,
Note capital earnings reserves total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
2011
COMPANY
Opening balance at 1 January 2011 8,870,907 1,307,593 185,366 10,363,866
Profit for the year – 164,145 – 164,145
Other comprehensive income for the year – – – –
Total comprehensive income for the year – 164,145 – 164,145
Grant of equity-settled share options 29(b)(vii) – – 19,964 19,964

Issue of shares pursuant to exercise of share options 29(b)(vii) 16,753 – (5,600) 11,153
Dividends on ordinary shares 38 – (279,820) – (279,820)
Total transactions with owners in their capacity
as owners 16,753 (279,820) 14,364 (248,703)
Closing balance at 31 December 2011 8,887,660 1,191,918 199,730 10,279,308
2010
COMPANY
Opening balance at 1 January 2010 8,850,494 1,146,072 171,008 10,167,574
Profit for the year – 546,179 – 546,179
Other comprehensive income for the year – – (13,685) (13,685)
Total comprehensive income for the year – 546,179 (13,685) 532,494
Grant of equity-settled share options 29(b)(vii) – – 34,742 34,742

Issue of shares pursuant to exercise of share options 29(b)(vii) 18,892 – (6,501) 12,391
Issue of shares pursuant to conversion of convertible bonds 29(b)(i) 1,521 – (198) 1,323
Dividends on ordinary shares 38 – (384,658) – (384,658)
Total transactions with owners in their capacity
as owners 20,413 (384,658) 28,043 (336,202)
Closing balance at 31 December 2010 8,870,907 1,307,593 185,366 10,363,866

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Cash flows from operating activities

Profit before tax 2,078,741 1,644,186
Adjustments for:
Net gains from changes in fair value of biological assets (262,657) (251,017)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment 478,112 315,353
Loss on liquidation/disposal of associates 1,333 2,368
Fair value gain arising from step acquisition resulting in an associate
becoming a subsidiary – (1,288)
Amortisation of intangible assets 461 256
Gain on bargain purchase of subsidiaries/an associate (7,348) (217)
Positive goodwill written off to income statement 4 286
Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment (10,817) (9,063)
(Gain)/loss on liquidation of subsidiaries (613) 35
Loss/(gain) on disposal of available-for-sale financial assets 38 (19,876)
Gain on disposal of financial assets held for trading (21,123) (7,720)
Grant of share options to employees 19,964 34,742
Net loss on the fair value of derivative financial instruments 21,416 145,648
Net fair value loss/(gain) on financial assets held for trading 89,856 (20,090)
Foreign exchange differences arising from translation 25,888 66,588
Interest expense 548,857 208,465
Interest income (246,613) (135,352)
Share of results of associates (185,255) (38,127)
Operating cash flows before working capital changes 2,530,244 1,935,177
Changes in working capital:
Increase in inventories (531,080) (2,457,005)
Decrease/(increase) in receivables and other assets 63,775 (1,336,285)
Increase/(decrease) in payables 488,882 (133,181)
Cash flows generated from/(used in) operations 2,551,821 (1,991,294)
Interest paid (493,094) (197,746)
Interest received 158,405 135,352
Income taxes paid (269,396) (265,163)
Net cash flows generated from/(used in) operating activities 1,947,736 (2,318,851)

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Cash flows from investing activities

Net cash flow on acquisition of subsidiaries (164,286) (1,546,033)
Payments for acquisition of additional interest in subsidiaries (18,679) (10,605)
(Increase)/decrease in plasma investments (3,081) 1,761
Increase in financial assets held for trading (84,598) (42,380)
Increase in other non-financial assets (74,076) (22,000)
Payments for property, plant and equipment (1,481,596) (996,723)
Payments for biological assets (72,217) (67,012)
(Increase)/decrease in available-for-sale financial assets (66,136) 22,973
Payments for investment in associates (172,822) (122,073)
Payments for intangible assets (1,662) (1,144)
Dividends received from associates 18,330 22,525
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment 47,154 110,780
Proceeds from disposal of biological assets 5,338 705
Proceeds from disposal of intangible assets 88 –
Proceeds from disposal of associates – 20,569
Net cash flow on liquidation of subsidiaries – (200)
Net cash flows used in investing activities (2,068,243) (2,628,857)
Cash flows from financing activities

Decrease/(increase) in net amount due from related parties 1,718 (67,183)
Increase in net amount due from associates (80,058) (10,730)
Increase in advances from non-controlling shareholders 29,799 17,427
Proceeds from bank loans 3,762,458 7,664,859
Increase in fixed deposits pledged with financial institutions for bank facilities (733,208) (1,829,830)
Repayments of finance lease liabilities (35) (35)
Decrease in other deposits with maturity more than 3 months 106,952 246,841
Interest paid (54,655) (8,742)
Increase in other financial receivables (1,771,309) (668,084)
Dividends paid by the Company (279,820) (384,658)
Dividends paid to non-controlling shareholders by subsidiaries (29,075) (41,722)
Proceeds from issue of shares by the Company 11,153 12,391
Proceeds from issue of shares by subsidiaries to non-controlling shareholders 35,770 25,386
Net cash flows generated from financing activities 999,690 4,955,920
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents 879,183 8,212

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the financial year 400,475 392,263
Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the financial year 1,279,658 400,475

Notes to the Financial Statements
31 December 2011
1. CORPORATE INFORMATION
Wilmar International Limited (the “Company”) is a limited liability company, incorporated in Singapore and is listed on the Singapore
Exchange Securities Trading Limited (“SGX-ST”).
The registered office and principal place of business of the Company is located at 56 Neil Road, Singapore 088830.
The principal activities of the Company are those of investment holding and the provision of management services to its subsidiaries.
The principal activities of the significant subsidiaries are disclosed in Note 39 to the financial statements.
2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES

2.1 Basis of preparation
The consolidated financial statements of the Group and the balance sheet and statement of changes in equity of the Company have
been prepared in accordance with Singapore Financial Reporting Standards (“FRS”).
The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis, except as disclosed in the accounting policies below.
The financial statements are presented in US Dollars (“USD” or “US$”), which is also the parent company’s functional currency, except
when otherwise indicated. All values in the tables are rounded to the nearest thousands (US$’000) as indicated.
The accounting policies have been consistently applied by the Group and the Company and are consistent with those used in the
previous financial year except for the adoption of new and revised FRS as mentioned under Note 2.2 (i).
2.2 Changes in accounting policies
(i) Adoption of new and revised FRS

With effect from 1 January 2011, the Group has adopted all the new and revised FRS and Interpretation (“INT”) FRS that are
mandatory for financial years beginning on or after 1 January 2011. The adoption of these FRS and INT FRS did not have any
significant impact on the financial performance or position of the Group and the Company.
(ii) Future changes in accounting policies

The Group has not adopted the following standards and interpretations that have been issued but not yet effective:
Effective for annual periods

Description beginning on or after
Amendments to FRS 101 – Severe Hyperinflation and Removal of Fixed Dates for First-time Adopters 1 July 2011
Amendments to FRS 107 Disclosures – Transfers of Financial Assets 1 July 2011
Amendments to FRS 12 Deferred Tax – Recovery of Underlying Assets 1 January 2012
Amendments to FRS 1 – Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income 1 July 2012
FRS 19 – Employee Benefits 1 January 2013
FRS 27 – Separate Financial Statements 1 January 2013
FRS 28 – Investments in Associates and Joint Ventures 1 January 2013
FRS 110 – Consolidated Financial Statements 1 January 2013
FRS 111 – Joint Arrangements 1 January 2013
FRS 112 – Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities 1 January 2013
FRS 113 – Fair Value Measurements 1 January 2013

31 December 2011
2. SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES (continued)

2.2 Changes in accounting policies (continued)
(ii) Future changes in accounting policies (continued)

Except for the Amendments to FRS 1 and FRS 112, the directors expect that the adoption of the standards and interpretations
above will have no material impact on the financial statements in the period of initial application. The nature of the impending
changes in accounting policy on adoption of the Amendments to FRS 1 and FRS 112 is described below.
Amendments to FRS 1 Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income
The Amendments to FRS 1 Presentation of Items of Other Comprehensive Income (“OCI”) is effective for financial periods
beginning on or after 1 July 2012.
The Amendments of FRS 1 changes the grouping of items presented in OCI. Items that could be reclassified to profit or loss at a
future point in time would be presented separately from items which will never be reclassified. As the Amendments only affect
the presentations of items that are already recognised in OCI, the Group does not expect any impact on its financial position or
performance upon adoption of this standard.
FRS 112 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities
FRS 112 is effective for financial periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013.
FRS 112 is a new and comprehensive standard on disclosure requirements for all forms of interest in other entities, including
joint arrangements, associates, special purpose vehicles and other off balance sheet vehicles. FRS 112 requires an entity to
disclose information that helps users of its financial statements to evaluate the nature and risks associated with its interests in
other entities and the effects of those interests on its financial statements. The Group is currently determining the impact of the
disclosure requirements. As this is a disclosure standard, it will have no impact to the financial position and financial performance
of the Group when implemented in 2013.
2.3 Basis of consolidation and business combinations
(a) Basis of consolidation

Basis of consolidation from 1 January 2010
The consolidated financial statements comprise the financial statements of the Company and its subsidiaries as at the end of the
reporting period. The financial statements of the subsidiaries used in the preparation of the consolidated financial statements
are prepared for the same reporting date as the Company. Consistent accounting policies are applied to like transactions and
events in similar circumstances.
All intra-group balances, income and expenses and unrealised gains and losses resulting from intra-group transactions and
dividends are eliminated in full.
With the exception of business combinations involving entities under common control, acquisitions of subsidiaries are accounted
for by applying the acquisition method. Identifiable assets acquired and liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed in a
business combination are measured initially at their fair values at the acquisition date. Acquisition-related costs are recognised
as expenses in the periods in which the costs are incurred and the services are received.

31 December 2011

2.3 Basis of consolidation and business combinations (continued)
(a) Basis of consolidation (continued)

Basis of consolidation from 1 January 2010 (continued)
Subsidiaries are consolidated from the date of acquisition, being the date on which the Group obtains control, and continue to
be consolidated until the date that such control ceases.
Losses within a subsidiary are attributed to the non-controlling interest even if that results in a deficit balance.
Basis of consolidation prior to 1 January 2010
Certain of the above-mentioned requirements were applied on a prospective basis. The following differences, however, are
carried forward in certain instances from the previous basis of consolidation:
Acquisition of non-controlling interests, prior to 1 January 2010, was accounted for using the parent entity extension method,
whereby, the difference between the consideration and the book value of the share of the net assets acquired were recognised
in goodwill.
Losses incurred by the Group were attributed to the non-controlling interest until the balance was reduced to nil. Any further
losses were attributed to the Group, unless the non-controlling interest had a binding obligation to cover these. Losses prior to
1 January 2010 were not reallocated between non-controlling interest and the owners of the Company.
Upon loss of control, the Group accounted for the investment retained at its proportionate share of net asset value at the date
control was lost. The carrying value of such investments as at 1 January 2010 has not been restated.
(b) Business combinations

Business combinations from 1 January 2010
When the Group acquires a business, it assesses the financial assets and liabilities assumed for appropriate classification and
designation in accordance with the contractual terms, economic circumstances and pertinent conditions as at the acquisition
date. This includes the separation of embedded derivatives in host contracts by the acquiree.
Any contingent consideration to be transferred by the acquirer will be recognised at fair value at the acquisition date. Subsequent
changes to the fair value of the contingent consideration which is deemed to be an asset or a liability, will be recognised in
accordance with FRS 39 either in the income statement or as a change to other comprehensive income. If the contingent
consideration is classified as equity, it is not remeasured until it is finally settled within equity.
In business combinations achieved in stages, previously held equity interests in the acquiree are remeasured to fair value at the
acquisition date and any corresponding gain or loss is recognised in the income statement.
The Group elects for each individual business combination, whether non-controlling interest in the acquiree (if any) is recognised
on the acquisition date at fair value, or at the non-controlling interest’s proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.
Any excess of the sum of the fair value of the consideration transferred in the business combination, the amount of non-
controlling interest in the acquiree (if any), and the fair value of the Group’s previously held equity interest in the acquiree
(if any), over the net fair value of the acquiree’s identifiable assets and liabilities is recorded as goodwill. The accounting policy for
goodwill is set out in Note 2.11(a). In instances where the latter amount exceeds the former, the excess is recognised as gain on
bargain purchase in the income statement on the acquisition date.

31 December 2011

2.3 Basis of consolidation and business combinations (continued)
(b) Business combinations (continued)

Business combinations from 1 January 2010 (continued)
Business combinations involving entities under common control are accounted for by applying the pooling-of-interest method.
The assets and liabilities of the combining entities are reflected at their carrying amounts reported in the consolidated financial
statements of the controlling holding company. Any difference between the consideration paid and the share capital of the
acquired entity is reflected within equity as merger reserve. The income statement reflects the results of the combining entities
for the full year, irrespective of when the combination takes place. Comparatives are presented as if the entities had always been
combined since the date the entities had come under common control.
No adjustments are made to reflect the fair values on the date of combination, or recognise any new assets or liabilities. No
additional goodwill is recognised as a result of the combination.
Business combinations before 1 January 2010
In comparison to the above mentioned requirements, the following differences applied:
Business combinations are accounted for by applying the purchase method. Transaction costs directly attributable to the
acquisition formed part of the acquisition costs. The non-controlling interest (formerly known as minority interest) was measured
at the proportionate share of the acquiree’s identifiable net assets.
Business combinations achieved in stages were accounted for as separate steps. Adjustments to those fair values relating to
previously held interests are treated as a revaluation and recognised in equity. When the Group acquired a business, embedded
derivatives separated from the host contract by the acquiree are not reassessed on acquisition unless the business combination
results in a change in the terms of the contract that significantly modifies the cash flows that would otherwise be required under
the contract.
Contingent consideration was recognised if, and only if, the Group had a present obligation, the economic outflow was more
likely than not and a reliable estimate was determinable. Subsequent adjustments to the contingent consideration were
recognised as part of goodwill.
2.4 Transactions with non-controlling interests

Non-controlling interest represents the equity in subsidiaries not attributable, directly or indirectly, to owners of the parent, and are
presented separately in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income and within equity in the consolidated balance sheet,
separately from equity attributable to owners of the parent.
Changes in the Company owners’ ownership interest in a subsidiary that do not result in a loss of control are accounted for as equity
transactions. In such circumstances, the carrying amounts of the controlling and non-controlling interests are adjusted to reflect
the changes in their relative interests in the subsidiary. Any difference between the amount by which the non-controlling interest
is adjusted and the fair value of the consideration paid or received is recognised directly in equity as equity transaction reserve and
attributed to owners of the parent.

31 December 2011

2.5 Foreign currency
Transactions in foreign currencies are measured in the respective functional currencies of the Company and its subsidiaries and are
recorded on initial recognition in the functional currencies at exchange rates approximating those ruling at the transaction dates.
Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are translated at the rate of exchange ruling at the end of the
reporting period. Non-monetary items that are measured in terms of historical cost in a foreign currency are translated using the
exchange rates as at the dates of the initial transactions. Non-monetary items measured at fair value in a foreign currency are translated
using the exchange rates at the date when the fair value was determined.
Exchange differences arising on the settlement of monetary items or on translating monetary items at the end of the reporting period
are recognised in the income statement except for exchange differences arising on monetary items that form part of the Group’s
net investment in foreign operations, which are recognised initially in other comprehensive income and accumulated under foreign
currency translation reserve in equity. The foreign currency translation reserve is reclassified from equity to the income statement of
the Group on disposal of the foreign operation.
For consolidation purpose, the assets and liabilities of foreign operations are translated into USD at the rate of exchange ruling at
the end of the reporting period and their income statements are translated at the weighted average exchange rates for the year. The
exchange differences arising on the translation are recognised in other comprehensive income. On disposal of a foreign operation,
the component of other comprehensive income relating to that particular foreign operation is recognised in the income statement.
In the case of a partial disposal without loss of control of a subsidiary that includes a foreign operation, the proportionate share of the
cumulative amount of the exchange differences are re-attributed to non-controlling interest and are not recognised in the income
statement. For partial disposals of associates or jointly controlled entities that are foreign operations, the proportionate share of the
accumulated exchange differences is reclassified to the income statement.
2.6 Subsidiaries
A subsidiary is an entity over which the Group has the power to govern the financial and operating policies so as to obtain benefits
from its activities.
In the Company’s separate financial statements, investment in subsidiaries is accounted for at cost less accumulated impairment losses.
2.7 Associates
An associate is an entity, not being a subsidiary or a joint venture, in which the Group has significant influence. An associate is equity
accounted for from the date the Group obtains significant influence until the date the Group ceases to have significant influence over
the associate.
The Group’s investment in associates is accounted for using the equity method. Under the equity method, the investment in associate
is measured in the balance sheet at cost plus post-acquisition changes in the Group’s share of net assets of the associate. Goodwill
relating to an associate is included in the carrying amount of the investment and is neither amortised nor tested individually for
impairment. Any excess of the Group’s share of net fair value of the associate’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities
over the cost of the investment is excluded from the carrying amount of the investment and is recognised as income as part of the
Group’s share of results of the associate in the period in which the investment is acquired.
When the Group’s share of losses in an associate equals or exceeds its interest in the associate, the Group does not recognise further
losses once its interest in the associate is reduced to zero, unless it has incurred obligations or made payments on behalf of the
associate. If the associate subsequently reports profits, the Group resumes recognising its share of those profits only after its share of
the profits equals the share of losses not recognised.

31 December 2011

2.7 Associates (continued)
The Group’s profit or loss reflects its share of the associates’ profit or loss after tax and non-controlling interests in the subsidiaries of
associates. Where there has been a change recognised in other comprehensive income by the associates, the Group recognises its
share of such changes in other comprehensive income. Unrealised gains and losses resulting from transactions between the Group
and the associate are eliminated to the extent of the interest in the associates.
After application of the equity method, the Group determines whether it is necessary to recognise an additional impairment loss on
the Group’s investment in its associates. The Group determines at each end of the reporting period whether there is any objective
evidence that the investment in the associate is impaired. If this is the case, the Group calculates the amount of impairment as the
difference between the recoverable amount of the associate and its carrying value and recognises the amount in the income statement.
The most recent available audited financial statements of the associated companies are used by the Group in applying the equity
method. Where the dates of the audited financial statements used are not co-terminous with those of the Group, the share of results
is arrived at from the last audited financial statements available and unaudited management financial statements to the end of the
accounting period. Where necessary, adjustments are made to bring the accounting policies in line with those of the Group.
Upon loss of significant influence over the associate, the Group measures and recognises any retained investment at its fair value. Any
difference between the carrying amount of the associate upon loss of significant influence and the fair value of the aggregate of the
retained investment and proceeds from disposal is recognised in the income statement.
In the Company’s separate financial statements, investments in associates are carried at cost less accumulated impairment loss.
2.8 Property, plant and equipment

All items of property, plant and equipment are initially recorded at costs, such costs include the cost of replacing parts of the property,
plant and equipment and borrowing costs that are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of a qualifying
property, plant and equipment. The cost of an item of property, plant and equipment is recognised as an asset if, and only if, it is
probable that future economic benefits associated with the item will flow to the Group and the cost of the item can be measured
reliably.
Subsequent to recognition, all items of property, plant and equipment, except for freehold land, are measured at cost less accumulated
depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. Freehold land has an unlimited useful life and therefore is not depreciated.
Depreciation of an asset begins when it is available for use and is computed on a straight-line basis over the estimated useful life of
the asset as follows:
Land and land rights – amortised over the period of leases (25 to 70 years)
Buildings – 10 to 40 years
Plant and machineries – 4 to 40 years
Furniture, fittings and office equipment – 2 to 20 years
Vessels – 5 to 25 years
Motor vehicles, trucks and aircrafts – 4 to 15 years
The cost of construction-in-progress represents all costs, including borrowing costs, incurred on the construction of the assets. The
accumulated costs will be reclassified to the appropriate property, plant and equipment account when the construction is completed.
No depreciation is provided on construction-in-progress as these assets are not yet available for use.

31 December 2011

2.8 Property, plant and equipment (continued)
Interest on borrowings to finance the construction of property, plant and equipment is capitalised during the period of time that is
required to complete and prepare each asset for its intended use. All other borrowing costs are expensed.
Repairs and maintenance costs are taken to the income statement during the financial period in which they are incurred. The cost of
major renovations and restorations is included in the carrying amount of the asset when it is probable that future economic benefits
in excess of the originally assessed standard of performance of the existing asset will flow to the Group, and is depreciated over the
remaining useful life of the asset.
The carrying values of property, plant and equipment are reviewed for impairment when events or changes in circumstances indicate
that the carrying value may not be recoverable.
The residual values, useful life and depreciation method are reviewed at each financial year end to ensure that the amount, method
and period of depreciation are consistent with previous estimates and the expected pattern of consumption of the future economic
benefits embodied in the items of property, plant and equipment.
An item of property, plant and equipment is derecognised upon disposal or when no future economic benefits are expected from
its use or disposal. Any gain or loss arising on derecognition of the asset is included in the income statement in the year the asset
is derecognised.
2.9 Biological assets

Biological assets, include mature and immature oil palm plantations. Immature plantations are stated at acquisition cost which
includes costs incurred for field preparation, planting, fertilising and maintenance, capitalisation of borrowing costs incurred on loans
used to finance the developments of immature plantations and an allocation of other indirect costs based on planted hectares.
Mature plantations are stated at fair value less estimated point-of-sale costs, with any resultant gain or loss recognised in the income
statement. In general, oil palm are considered mature 30 to 36 months after field planting. Point-of-sale costs include all costs that
would be necessary to sell the assets.
The fair value of the mature oil palm plantations is estimated by reference to independent professional valuations using the discounted
cash flows of the underlying biological assets. The expected cash flows from the whole life cycle of the mature oil palm plantations
is determined using the market price and the estimated yield of the agricultural produce, being fresh fruit bunches (“FFB”), net of
maintenance and harvesting costs and any costs required to bring the oil palm plantations to maturity. The estimated yield of the oil
palm plantations is dependent on the age of the oil palm trees, the location of the plantations, soil type and infrastructure. The market
price of the FFB is largely dependent on the prevailing market prices of crude palm oil and palm kernel.
2.10 Plasma investments

Cost incurred during the development phase up to the conversion of the Plasma plantation are capitalised as Plasma investments. The
development of the Plasma oil palm plantations is financed by plasma loans, which was received by the plasma farmers (represented
by “Cooperatives”), plus additional funding by the Company, should bank financing not be adequate to finance the development
costs. Accumulated development costs are presented net of the plasma loans and are presented as “Plasma investments”.
When the carrying amount of the Plasma investments is higher than its estimated recoverable amount, it is written down immediately
to its recoverable amount. The difference between the accumulated development costs of Plasma plantations and their conversion
value is charged to the income statement.

31 December 2011

2.11 Intangible assets
(a) Goodwill
Goodwill acquired in a business combination is initially measured at cost. Following initial recognition, goodwill is measured
at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Goodwill is reviewed for impairment annually or more frequently if events and
circumstances indicate that the carrying value may be impaired.
For the purpose of impairment testing, goodwill acquired in a business combination is, from the acquisition date, allocated to
each of the Group’s cash-generating units, or groups of cash-generating units, that are expected to benefit from the synergies of
the combination, irrespective of whether other assets or liabilities of the acquiree are assigned to those units or groups of units.
A cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) to which goodwill has been allocated is tested for impairment annually
and whenever there is an indication that the cash-generating unit may be impaired, by comparing the carrying amount of the
cash-generating unit, including the goodwill, with the recoverable amount of the cash-generating unit. Where the recoverable
amount of the cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) is less than the carrying amount, an impairment loss is
recognised in the income statement. Impairment losses recognised for goodwill are not reversed in subsequent periods.
Where goodwill forms part of a cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) and part of the operation within that
cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) is disposed of, the goodwill associated with the operation disposed of
is included in the carrying amount of the operation when determining the gain or loss on disposal of the operation. Goodwill
disposed of in this circumstance is measured based on the relative fair values of the operations disposed of and the portion of
the cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) retained.
(b) Other intangible assets

Intangible assets acquired separately are measured initially at cost. The cost of intangible assets acquired in a business
combination is their fair values as at the date of acquisition. Following initial acquisition, intangible assets are measured at cost
less any accumulated amortisation and accumulated impairment losses.
The useful lives of intangible assets are assessed as either finite or indefinite.
Intangible assets with finite useful lives are amortised over their estimated useful lives and assessed for impairment whenever
there is an indication that the intangible asset may be impaired. The amortisation period and the amortisation method are
reviewed at least at each financial year end. Changes in the expected useful life or the expected pattern of consumption of future
economic benefits embodied in the asset is accounted for by changing the amortisation period or method, as appropriate, and
are treated as changes in accounting estimates. The amortisation expense on intangible assets with finite lives is recognised in
the income statement in the expense category consistent with the function of the intangible asset.
Intangible assets with indefinite useful lives or not yet available for use are tested for impairment annually or more frequently
if events and circumstances indicate that the carrying value may be impaired either individually or at the cash-generating unit
level. Such intangible assets are not amortised. The useful life of an intangible asset with an indefinite useful life is reviewed
annually to determine whether the useful life assessment continues to be supportable.
Gains or losses arising from the derecognition of an intangible asset are measured as the difference between the net disposal
proceeds and the carrying amount of the asset and are recognised in the income statement when the asset is derecognised.

31 December 2011

2.11 Intangible assets (continued)
(b) Other intangible assets (continued)

(i) Brands
The brands were acquired in business combinations. The useful lives of the brands are estimated to be indefinite because
based on the current market share of the brands, management believes there is no foreseeable limit to the period over
which the brands are expected to generate net cash inflows for the Group.
(ii) Trademarks & licences and others
Trademarks and licences acquired are initially recognised at cost and are subsequently carried at cost less accumulated
amortisation and accumulated impairment losses. These costs are amortised to the income statement using the straight
line method over 3 to 20 years.
2.12 Financial assets

Financial assets are recognised when, and only when, the Group becomes a party to the contractual provisions of the financial
instrument.
When financial assets are recognised initially, they are measured at fair value, plus, in the case of financial assets not at fair value
through profit or loss, directly attributable transaction costs.
A financial asset is derecognised where the contractual right to receive cash flows from the asset has expired. On derecognition
of a financial asset in its entirety, the difference between the carrying amount and the sum of the consideration received and any
cumulative gain or loss that had been recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement.
All regular way purchases and sales of financial assets are recognised or derecognised on the trade date i.e. the date that the Group
commits to purchase or sell the asset. Regular way purchases or sales are purchases or sales of financial assets that require delivery of
assets within the period generally established by regulation or convention in the market place concerned.
The Group determines the classification of its financial assets at initial recognition and, where allowed and appropriate, re-evaluates
this designation at each financial year end.
(a) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Financial assets held for trading are classified as financial assets at fair value through profit or loss. Financial assets held for trading
are derivatives (including separated embedded derivatives) or financial assets acquired principally for the purpose of selling or
repurchasing in the near term.
The Group does not designate any financial assets which are not held for trading at initial recognition as financial assets at fair
value through profit or loss.
Subsequent to initial recognition, financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are measured at fair value. Any gains or losses
arising from changes in fair value of the financial assets are recognised in the income statement. Net gains or net losses on the
financial assets at fair value through profit or loss include exchange differences.

31 December 2011

2.12 Financial assets (continued)
(a) Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss (continued)

Derivatives embedded in host contracts are accounted for as separate derivatives and recorded at fair value if their economic
characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contracts and the host contracts are not held for trading or
designated at fair value through profit or loss. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value
recognised in the income statement. Reassessment only occurs if there is a change in the terms of the contract that significantly
modified the cash flows that would otherwise be required.
(b) Loans and receivables

Non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market are classified as
loans and receivables. Subsequent to initial recognition, loans and receivables are measured at amortised cost using the effective
interest method less impairment. Gains and losses are recognised in the income statement when the loans and receivables are
derecognised or impaired, and through the amortisation process.
(c) Held-to-maturity investments

Non-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments and fixed maturity are classified as held-to-maturity when
the Group has the positive intention and ability to hold the investment to maturity. Subsequent to initial recognition, held-to-
maturity investments are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method less impairment. Gains and losses are
recognised in the income statement when the held-to-maturity investments are derecognised or impaired, and through the
amortisation process.
(d) Available-for-sale financial assets

Available-for-sale financial assets include equity and debt securities. Equity investments classified as available-for-sale are those
which are neither classified as held for trading nor designated at fair value through profit or loss. Debt securities in this category
are those which are intended to be held for an indefinite period of time and which may be sold in response to needs for liquidity
or in response to changes in the market conditions.
After initial recognition, available-for-sale financial assets are measured at fair value. Any gains or losses from changes in fair value
of the financial asset are recognised initially in other comprehensive income and accumulated under fair value reserve in equity,
except that impairment losses, foreign exchange gains and losses on monetary instruments and interest calculated using the
effective interest method are recognised in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in other
comprehensive income is reclassified from equity to the income statement when the financial asset is derecognised.
Investments in equity instruments whose fair value cannot be reliably measured are measured at cost less impairment loss.
2.13 Impairment of financial assets

The Group assesses at each end of the reporting period whether there is any objective evidence that a financial asset is impaired.
(a) Financial assets carried at amortised cost

If there is objective evidence that an impairment loss on financial assets carried at amortised cost has been incurred, the amount
of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash
flows discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. If a loan has a variable interest rate, the discount rate for
measuring any impairment loss is the current effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced through the use
of an allowance account. The impairment loss is recognised in the income statement.

31 December 2011

2.13 Impairment of financial assets (continued)
(a) Financial assets carried at amortised cost (continued)

When the asset becomes uncollectible, the carrying amount of impaired financial assets is reduced directly or if an amount has
been charged to the allowance account, the amount are written off against the carrying value of the financial asset.
To determine whether there is objective evidence that an impairment loss on financial assets has been incurred, the Group
considers factors such as the probability of insolvency or significant financial difficulties of the debtor and default or significant
delay in payments.
If in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases and the decrease can be related objectively to an event
occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed to the extent that the
carrying amount of the asset does not exceed its amortised cost at the reversal date. The amount of reversal is recognised in the
income statement.
(b) Financial assets carried at cost

If there is objective evidence (such as significant adverse changes in the business environment where the issuer operates,
probability of insolvency or significant financial difficulties of the issuer) that an impairment loss on financial assets carried at cost
has been incurred, the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present
value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the current market rate of return for a similar financial asset. Such impairment
losses are not reversed in subsequent periods.
(c) Available-for-sale financial assets

Significant or prolonged decline in fair value below cost, significant financial difficulties of the issuer or obligor, and the
disappearance of an active trading market are considerations to determine whether there is objective evidence that investment
securities classified as available-for-sale financial assets are impaired.
If an available-for-sale financial asset is impaired, an amount comprising the difference between its cost (net of any principal
payment and amortisation) and its current fair value, less any impairment loss previously recognised in the income statement,
is transferred from other comprehensive income and recognised in the income statement. Reversals of impairment losses
in respect of equity instruments are not recognised in the income statement, increase in their fair value after impairment is
recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Reversals of impairment losses on debt instruments are recognised in the
income statement if the increase in fair value of the debt instrument can be objectively related to an event occurring after the
impairment loss was recognised in the income statement.
In the case of debt instruments classified as available-for-sale, impairment is assessed based on the same criteria as financial
assets carried at amortised cost. However, the amount recorded for impairment is the cumulative loss measured as the difference
between the amortised cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss on that investment previously recognised in
income statement. Future interest income continues to be accrued based on the reduced carrying amount of the asset, using
the rate of interest used to discount the future cash flows for the purpose of measuring the impairment loss. The interest income
is recorded as part of finance income.

31 December 2011

2.14 Impairment of non-financial asset
The Group assesses at each reporting date whether there is an indication that an asset may be impaired. If any such indication exists,
or when annual impairment testing for an asset is required, the Group makes an estimate of the asset’s recoverable amount.
An asset’s recoverable amount is the higher of an asset’s or cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use and is
determined for an individual asset, unless the asset does not generate cash inflows that are largely independent of those from other
assets. In assessing value in use, the estimated future cash flows expected to be generated by the asset are discounted to their present
value using a pre-tax discount rate that reflects current market assessments of the time value of money and the risks specific to the
asset. Where the carrying amount of an asset exceeds its recoverable amount, the asset is written down to its recoverable amount.
Impairment losses are recognised in the income statement except for assets that are previously revalued where the revaluation was
taken to other comprehensive income. In this case the impairment is also recognised in other comprehensive income up to the
amount of any previous revaluation.
For assets excluding goodwill, an assessment is made at each reporting date as to whether there is any indication that previously
recognised impairment losses may no longer exist or may have decreased. A previously recognised impairment loss is reversed only
if there has been a change in the estimates used to determine the asset’s recoverable amount since the last impairment loss was
recognised. If that is the case, the carrying amount of the asset is increased to its recoverable amount. That increase cannot exceed the
carrying amount that would have been determined, net of depreciation, had no impairment loss been recognised previously. Such
reversal is recognised in the income statement unless the asset is measured at revalued amount, in which case the reversal is treated
as a revaluation increase.
2.15 Cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and on hand, demand deposits, and short-term, highly liquid investments that
are readily convertible to known amounts of cash and which are subject to an insignificant risk of changes in value and have a short
maturity of generally within three months when acquired. These also include bank overdrafts that form an integral part of the Group’s
cash management. The accounting policy for this category of financial assets is stated in Note 2.12(b), under loans and receivables.
2.16 Inventories
(a) Physical inventories, futures and other forward contracts

Physical inventories of palm based products, oilseeds and grains products, consumer products, sugar and other agricultural
commodities are valued at the lower of cost and spot prices prevailing at the end of the reporting period. Cost is determined
using the weighted average method.
The Group has committed purchases and sales contracts for palm oil and other agricultural commodities that are entered into as
part of its manufacturing and sale activities. The prices and physical delivery of the sales and purchases are fixed in the contracts
and these contracts are not recognised in the financial statements until physical deliveries take place.
The Group also enters into non-physical delivery forward contracts and commodity derivatives to manage the price risk of its
physical inventory and to hedge against fluctuations in commodity prices. Commodity derivatives include futures, options and
swap contracts on palm oil and palm based products, soybeans and other non-palm products.
Gains or losses arising from matched forward and derivative contracts are recognised immediately in the income statement. Any
difference arising from the fair value assessment will be recognised in the financial statements. Unrealised losses arising from the
valuations are set off against unrealised gains on an aggregated basis.

31 December 2011

2.16 Inventories (continued)
(a) Physical inventories, futures and other forward contracts (continued)

The outstanding forward and derivative contracts are valued at their fair value at the end of the reporting period against quoted
market prices. Where the quoted market prices are not available, the fair values are based on management’s best estimate and
are arrived at by reference to the market prices of another contract that is substantially similar. The notional principal amounts of
the outstanding forward and futures contracts are off-balance sheet items.
(b) Other inventories

Other inventories are stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost is determined using the weighted average method.
Net realisable value is the estimated selling price less the costs of completion and selling expenses.
2.17 Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities within the scope of FRS 39 are recognised when, and only when, the Group becomes a party to the contractual
provisions of the financial instrument.
Financial liabilities are recognised initially at fair value, plus, in the case of financial liabilities other than derivatives, directly attributable
transactions costs.
Subsequent to initial recognition, all financial liabilities are measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method except for
derivatives which are measured at fair value.
For financial liabilities other than derivatives, gains and losses are recognised in the income statement when the liabilities are
derecognised, and through the amortisation process. Any gains or losses arising from changes in fair value of derivatives are recognised
in the income statement. Net gains or losses on derivatives include exchange differences.
The Group has not designated any financial liabilities upon initial recognition at fair value through profit or loss.
A financial liability is derecognised when the obligation under the liability is extinguished. When an existing financial liability is replaced
by another from the same lender on substantially different terms, or the terms of an existing liability are substantially modified, such an
exchange or modification is treated as a derecognition of the original liability and the recognition of a new liability, and the difference
in the respective carrying amounts is recognised in the income statement.
2.18 Borrowings
Borrowings are presented as current liabilities unless the Group has an unconditional right to defer settlement for at least twelve
months after the end of the reporting period.
(a) Borrowings
Borrowings are initially recognised at fair value (net of transaction costs) and subsequently carried at amortised cost. Any
difference between the proceeds (net of transaction costs) and the redemption value is recognised in the income statement
over the period of the borrowings using the effective interest method.

31 December 2011

2.18 Borrowings (continued)
(b) Convertible bonds

When convertible bonds are issued, the total proceeds are allocated to the liability component and the equity component,
which are separately presented on the balance sheet. Should there be embedded derivatives, the fair value of the embedded
derivatives is to be independently valued and separately presented on the balance sheet.
The liability component is recognised initially at its fair value, determined using a market interest rate for equivalent non-
convertible bonds. It is subsequently carried at amortised cost using the effective interest method until the liability is extinguished
on conversion or redemption of the bonds.
The difference between the total proceeds and the liability component and the fair value of the embedded derivatives is allocated
to the conversion option (equity component), which is presented in equity net of deferred tax effect. The carrying amount of
the conversion option is not adjusted in subsequent periods. When the conversion option is exercised, its carrying amount
will be transferred to the share capital account. When the conversion option lapses, its carrying amount will be transferred to
retained earnings.
2.19 Borrowing cost

Borrowing costs are recognised in the income statement as incurred except to the extent that they are capitalised. Borrowing costs
are capitalised as part of cost of a qualifying assets if they are directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of the
qualifying asset. Capitalisation of borrowing costs commences when the activities to prepare the asset for its intended use or sale are
in progress and the expenditures and borrowing costs are being incurred. Borrowing costs are capitalised until the assets are ready for
their intended use or sale. Borrowing costs consist of interest and other costs that an entity incurs in connection with the borrowing
of funds.
2.20 Financial guarantee

A financial guarantee contract is a contract that requires the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the holder for a loss it
incurs because a specified debtor fails to make payment when due in accordance with the term of a debt instrument.
Financial guarantees are recognised initially as a liability at fair value adjusted for transaction costs that are directly attributable to the
issuance of the guarantee. Subsequent to initial recognition, financial guarantees are recognised as income in the income statement
over the period of the guarantee. If it is probable that the liability will be higher than the amount initially recognised less amortisation,
the liability is recorded at the higher amount with the difference charged to the income statement.
2.21 Provisions
Provisions are recognised when the Group has a present obligation as a result of a past event, it is probable that an outflow of
economic resources will be required to settle the obligation and the amount of the obligation can be estimated reliably.
Provisions are reviewed at each end of the reporting period and adjusted to reflect the current best estimate. If it is no longer probable
that an outflow of economic resources will be required to settle the obligation, the provision is reversed. If the effect of the time value
of money is material, provisions are discounted using a current pre-tax rate that reflects, where appropriate, the risks specific to the
liability. When discounting is used, the increase in the provision due to the passage of time is recognised as a finance cost.

31 December 2011

2.22 Employee benefits
(a) Defined contribution plans

The Group participates in the national pension schemes as defined by the laws of the countries in which it has operations. In
particular, the Singapore companies in the Group make contributions to the Central Provident Fund scheme in Singapore, a
defined contribution pension scheme. Contributions to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised as an expense in
the period in which the related service is performed.
(b) Employee share option plans

Employees of the Group receive remuneration in the form of share options as consideration for services rendered. The cost of
these equity-settled share based payment transactions with employees is measured by reference to the fair value of the options
at the date on which the options are granted which takes into account market conditions and non-vesting conditions. This cost is
recognised in the income statement, with a corresponding increase in the employee share option reserve, over the vesting period.
The cumulative expense recognised at each reporting date until the vesting date reflects the extent to which the vesting period
has expired and the Group’s best estimate of the number of options that will ultimately vest. The charge or credit to the income
statement for a period represents the movement in cumulative expense recognised as at the beginning and end of that period.
No expense is recognised for options that do not ultimately vest, except for options where vesting is conditional upon a market
condition or non-vesting condition, which are treated as vesting irrespective of whether or not the market condition or non-
vesting condition is satisfied, provided that all other performance and/or service conditions are satisfied. In the case where the
option does not vest as the result of a failure to meet a non-vesting condition that is within the control of the Group or the
employee, it is accounted for as a cancellation. In such case, the amount of the compensation cost that otherwise would be
recognised over the remainder of the vesting period is recognised immediately in the income statement upon cancellation.
The employee share option reserve is transferred to retained earnings upon expiry of the share options. When the options are
exercised, the employee share option reserve is transferred to share capital if new shares are issued, or to treasury shares if the
options are satisfied by the reissuance of treasury shares.
(c) Provision for employee service entitlements

For certain companies in Indonesia, the Group recognises a provision for employee service entitlements in accordance with
Labour Law No. 13/2003 dated 25 March 2003. The provision is based on an actuarial calculation by an independent actuary
using the “Projected Unit Credit Method”. Actuarial gains or losses are recognised as income or expense when the cumulative
actuarial gains or losses exceed 10% of the defined benefit obligation. These gains or losses are recognised over the expected
remaining working lives of employees. Past service cost is amortised over the remaining working lives of each employee.
2.23 Leases
The determination of whether an arrangement is, or contains a lease is based on the substance of the arrangement at inception date:
whether fulfilment of the arrangement is dependent on the use of a specific asset or assets or the arrangement conveys a right to use
the asset, even if that right is not explicitly specified in an arrangement. For arrangements entered into prior to 1 January 2005, the date
of inception is deemed to be 1 January 2005 in accordance with the transitional requirements of INT FRS 104.
(a) As lessee
Finance leases, which transfer to the Group substantially all the risks and rewards incidental to ownership of the leased item,
are capitalised at the inception of the lease at the fair value of the leased asset or, if lower, at the present value of the minimum
lease payments. Any initial direct costs are also added to the amount capitalised. Lease payments are apportioned between the
finance charges and reduction of the lease liability so as to achieve a constant rate of interest on the remaining balance of the
liability. Finance charges are charged to the income statement. Contingent rents, if any, are charged as expenses in the periods
in which they are incurred.

31 December 2011

2.23 Leases (continued)
(a) As lessee (continued)

Capitalised leased assets are depreciated over the shorter of the estimated useful life of the asset and the lease term, if there is
no reasonable certainty that the Group will obtain ownership by the end of the lease term.
Operating lease payments are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term.
The aggregate benefit of incentives provided by the lessor is recognised as a reduction of rental expense over the lease term on
a straight-line basis.
(b) As lessor
Leases where the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership of the asset are classified as operating
leases. Initial direct costs incurred in negotiating an operating lease are added to the carrying amount of the leased asset and
recognised over the lease term on the same bases as rental income. Contingent rents are recognised as revenue in the period in
which they are recognised.
2.24 Revenue
Revenue is recognised to the extent that it is probable that the economic benefits will flow to the Group and the revenue can be
reliably measured. Revenue is measured at the fair value of consideration received or receivable. The Group assesses its revenue
arrangements to determine if it is acting as principal or agent. The Group has concluded that it is acting as a principal in all of its
revenue arrangements.
(a) Sale of goods

Revenue from sales arising from the physical delivery of palm based products, oilseeds and grains products, consumer products,
sugar and other agricultural commodities is recognised when significant risks and rewards of ownership of goods are transferred
to the customer.
(b) Ship charter income

Revenue from time charters is recognised on a time apportionment basis.
(c) Interest income

Interest income is recognised using the effective interest method.
(d) Dividend income

Dividend income is recognised when the Group’s right to receive payment is established.
2.25 Income taxes
(a) Current tax

Current tax assets and liabilities for the current and prior periods are measured at the amount expected to be recovered from or
paid to the taxation authorities. The tax rates and tax laws used to compute the amount are those that are enacted or substantively
enacted by the end of the reporting period, in the countries where the Group operates and generates taxable income.
Current taxes are recognised in the income statement except when they relate to items recognised outside the income
statement, either in other comprehensive income or directly in equity.

31 December 2011

2.25 Income taxes (continued)
(b) Deferred tax

Deferred income tax is provided using the liability method on temporary differences at the end of the reporting period between
the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts for financial reporting purposes.
Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for all temporary differences, except:
• where the deferred income tax liability arises from the initial recognition of goodwill or of an asset or liability in a transaction
that is not a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither accounting profit nor taxable profit or
loss; and
• in respect of taxable temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries and associates, where the timing
of reversal of the temporary differences can be controlled and it is probable that the temporary differences will not reverse
in the foreseeable future.
Deferred income tax assets are recognised for all deductible temporary differences, carry forward of unused tax credits and
unused tax losses, to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary
differences, and the carry forward of unused tax credits and unused tax losses can be utilised except:
• where the deferred income tax asset relating to the deductible temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of
an asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither
accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss; and
• in respect of deductible temporary differences associated with investments in subsidiaries and associates, deferred income
tax assets are recognised only to the extent that it is probable that the temporary differences will reverse in the foreseeable
future and taxable profit will be available against which the temporary differences can be utilised.
The carrying amount of deferred tax asset is reviewed at each end of the reporting period and reduced to the extent that it
is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profit will be available to allow all or part of the deferred tax asset to be utilised.
Unrecognised deferred tax assets are reassessed at each end of the reporting period and are recognised to the extent that it has
become probable that future taxable profit will allow the deferred tax asset to be utilised.
Deferred tax assets and liabilities are measured at the tax rates that are expected to apply to the year when the asset is realised
or the liability is settled, based on tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the end of the
reporting period.
Deferred income tax relating to items recognised outside income statement is recognised outside income statement. Deferred
tax items are recognised in correlation to the underlying transaction either in other comprehensive income or directly in equity
and deferred tax arising from a business combination is adjusted against goodwill on acquisition.
Deferred income tax assets and deferred income tax liabilities are offset, if a legally enforceable right exists to set off current
income tax assets against current income tax liabilities and the deferred income taxes relate to the same taxable entity and the
same taxation authority.
Tax benefits acquired as part of a business combination, but not satisfying the criteria for separate recognition at that date,
would be recognised subsequently if new information about facts and circumstances changed. The adjustment would either
be treated as a reduction to goodwill (as long as it does not exceed goodwill) if it incurred during the measurement period or
recognised in the income statement.

31 December 2011

2.25 Income taxes (continued)
(c) Sales tax

Revenues, expenses and assets are recognised net of the amount of sales tax except:
• where the sales tax incurred in a purchase of assets or services is not recoverable from the taxation authority, in which case
the sales tax is recognised as part of the cost of acquisition of the asset or as part of the expense item as applicable; and
• receivables and payables that are stated with the amount of sales tax included.
The net amount of sales tax recoverable from, or payable to, the taxation authority is included as part of receivables or payables
in the balance sheet.
2.26 Derivative financial instrument and hedging activities

The Group uses derivative financial instruments such as forward currency contracts, forward freight agreements and various
commodities futures, options and swap contracts to hedge its risks associated with foreign currency, freight charges and commodity
price fluctuations. Such derivative financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date on which a derivative contract
is entered into, and are subsequently re-measured at fair value.
Any gains or losses arising from changes in fair value on derivatives that do not qualify for hedge accounting are taken directly to the
income statement.
The fair value of forward contracts is determined by reference to current forward prices for contracts with similar maturity profiles.
The fair value of forward freight agreements, futures, options and swap contracts is determined by reference to available market
information and option valuation methodology. The fair value of interest rate swap contracts is determined by reference to market
values for similar instruments. Where the quoted market prices are not available, the fair values are based on management’s best
estimate and are arrived at by reference to the market prices of another contract that is substantially similar.
Embedded derivatives are separated from the host contract and accounted for separately if the economic characteristics and risks of
the host contract and the embedded derivatives are not closely related, a separate instrument with the same terms as the embedded
derivative would meet the definition of a derivative, and the combined instruments are not measured at fair value through profit
or loss.
The Group applies hedge accounting for certain hedging relationships which qualify for hedge accounting. At the inception of a
hedge relationship, the Group formally designates and documents the hedge relationship to which the Group wishes to apply hedge
accounting and the risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. The documentation includes identification
of the hedged item or transaction, the hedging instrument, the nature of the risk being hedged and how the entity will assess the
hedging instrument’s effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to changes in the hedged item’s (or transaction’s) cash flows attributable
to or fair values of the hedged risk. Such hedges are expected to be highly effective in achieving offsetting changes in cash flows or
fair value, and are assessed on an ongoing basis to determine that they have been highly effective throughout the financial reporting
periods for which they are designated.
Hedges which meet the criteria for hedge accounting are accounted for as follows:
Fair value hedges
The change in the fair value of the hedging instrument is recognised in cost of sales in the income statement. The change in the fair
value of the hedged item attributable to the risk hedged is recorded as a part of the carrying value of the hedged item and is also
recognised in the income statement.

31 December 2011

2.26 Derivative financial instrument and hedging activities (continued)
Cash flow hedges
The effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised initially in other comprehensive income and
accumulated under the hedging reserve, while the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement.
Amounts recognised in other comprehensive income are transferred to the income statement when the hedged transaction affects
the income statement, such as when the hedged financial income or financial expense is recognised or when a forecast sale occurs.
Where the hedged item is the cost of a non-financial asset or non-financial liability, the amounts recognised as other comprehensive
income are transferred to the initial carrying amount of the non-financial asset or liability. The Group has elected not to apply basis
adjustments to hedges of forecast transactions that result in the recognition of a non-financial asset or a non-financial liability.
If the forecast transaction or firm commitment is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised
in equity are transferred to the income statement. If the hedging instrument expires or is sold, terminated or exercised without
replacement or rollover, or if its designation as a hedge is revoked, any cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in equity remains
in equity until the forecast transaction or firm commitment affects profit or loss.
2.27 Segment reporting

For management purposes, the Group is organised into operating segments based on their products and services which are
independently managed by the respective segment managers responsible for the performance of the respective segments under their
charge. The segment managers report directly to the management of the Company who regularly review the segment results in order
to allocate resources to the segments and to assess the segment performance. Additional disclosures on each of these segments are
shown in Note 37, including the factors used to identify the reportable segments and the measurement basis of segment information.
2.28 Share capital and share issue expenses

Proceeds from issuance of ordinary shares are recognised as share capital in equity. Incremental costs directly attributable to the
issuance of ordinary shares are deducted against share capital.
2.29 Contingencies
A contingent liability or asset is:
(a) A possible obligation or asset that arises from past events and whose existence will be confirmed only by the occurrence or
non-occurrence of one or more uncertain future events not wholly within the control of the Group; or
(b) A present obligation that arises from past events but is not recognised because:
(i) It is not probable that an outflow of resources embodying economic benefits will be required to settle the obligation; or
(ii) The amount of the obligation cannot be measured with sufficient reliability.
Contingent liabilities and assets are not recognised on the balance sheet of the Group, except for contingent liabilities assumed in a
business combination that are present obligations and which the fair values can be reliably determined.

31 December 2011

2.30 Government grants
Government grants are recognised at their fair value where there is reasonable assurance that the grant will be received and all
attaching conditions will be complied with. Where the grant relates to an asset, the fair value is recognised as deferred capital grant
on the balance sheet and is amortised to the income statement over the expected useful life of the relevant asset by equal annual
instalments. Where the grant relates to an expense item, it is recognised in the income statement over the period necessary to match
them on a systematic basis to the costs it is intended to compensate. Grants related to income are presented as a credit under other
operating income.
2.31 Related parties

A related party is defined as follows:
(a) A person or a close member of that person’s family is related to the Group and Company if that person:
(i) Has control or joint control over the Company;
(ii) Has significant influence over the Company; or
(iii) Is a member of the key management personnel of the Group or Company or of a parent of the Company.
(b) An entity is related to the Group and the Company if any of the following conditions applies:
(i) The entity and the Company are members of the same group (which means that each parent, subsidiary and fellow
subsidiary is related to the others);
(ii) One entity is an associate or joint venture of the other entity (or an associate or joint venture of a member of a group of
which the other entity is a member);
(iii) Both entities are joint ventures of the same third party;
(iv) One entity is a joint venture of a third entity and the other entity is an associate of the third entity;
(v) The entity is a post-employment benefit plan for the benefit of employees of either the Company or an entity related to
the Company. If the Company is itself such a plan, the sponsoring employers are also related to the Company;
(vi) The entity is controlled or jointly controlled by a person identified in (a); or
(vii) A person identified in (a) (i) has significant influence over the entity or is a member of the key management personnel of
the entity (or of a parent of the entity).

31 December 2011
3. SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING JUDGEMENT AND ESTIMATES

The preparation of the Group’s financial statements requires management to make judgements, estimates and assumptions that affect
the reported amounts of revenues, expenses, assets and liabilities, and the disclosure of contingent liabilities at the reporting date.
However, uncertainty about these assumptions and estimates could result in outcomes that could require a material adjustment to
the carrying amount of the asset or liability affected in the future.
Key sources of estimation uncertainty

The key assumptions concerning the future and other key sources of estimation uncertainty at the balance sheet date, that have
a significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities within the next financial year are
disclosed below.
(a) Impairment of goodwill and brand

The Group determines whether goodwill and brand are impaired on an annual basis. This requires an estimation of the value in
use of the cash-generating unit (or group of cash-generating units) to which the goodwill and brand are allocated. Estimating
the value in use requires the Group to make an estimate of the expected future cash flows from the cash-generating unit (or
group of cash-generating units) and also to choose a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present value of those cash
flows. The carrying amount of the Group’s goodwill and brand as at 31 December 2011 were approximately US$3,304,599,000
(2010: US$3,266,315,000) and US$1,101,625,000 (2010: US$1,101,625,000) respectively.
(b) Depreciation of plant and equipment

The cost of plant and equipment is depreciated on a straight line basis over their estimated useful lives. Management estimates
the useful lives of these plant and equipment to be within 2 to 40 years. These are common life expectancies applied in the
industry. Changes in the expected level of the usage and technological developments could impact the economic useful lives
and the residual values of these assets, therefore, future depreciation charges could be revised. The carrying amount of the
Group’s plant and equipment as at 31 December 2011 was approximately US$3,550,947,000 (2010: US$3,295,495,000).
(c) Income taxes

The Group has exposure to income taxes in various jurisdictions. Significant judgement is involved in determining the Group-
wide provision for income taxes. There are certain transactions and computations for which the ultimate tax determination is
uncertain during the ordinary course of business. The Group recognises liabilities for expected tax issues based on estimates of
whether additional taxes will be due. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts that were initially
recognised, such differences will impact the income tax and deferred tax provisions in the period in which such determination is
made. The carrying amounts of the Group’s income tax payable, deferred tax assets and deferred tax liabilities as at 31 December
2011 were approximately US$146,086,000 (2010: US$ 110,688,000), US$226,865,000 (2010: US$205,724,000) and US$639,422,000
(2010: US$527,293,000) respectively.
(d) Biological assets

The Group’s biological assets are stated at fair value less point-of-sale costs. This is estimated by reference to an independent
valuer’s assessment of the fair value of the biological assets. Changes in the conditions of the biological assets could impact
the fair value of the assets. The carrying amount of the Group’s biological assets as at 31 December 2011 was approximately
US$1,845,982,000 (2010: US$1,512,209,000).

31 December 2011
4. REVENUE
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Sales of palm based products, oilseeds and grains products,

consumer products and other agricultural commodities 44,499,696 30,229,456
Ship charter income 162,709 116,568
Others 47,629 31,500
44,710,034 30,377,524
5. COST OF SALES
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Cost of inventories recognised as expense – physical deliveries 37,340,408 25,044,779

Labour and other overhead expenses 3,932,876 2,349,735
Net loss/(gain) on non-physical delivery forward contracts ("paper trades") 32,709 (21,757)
Net (gain)/loss on fair value of derivative financial instruments (466,594) 497,613
40,839,399 27,870,370
6. INTEREST INCOME
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Interest income:
– From associates 10,978 6,589
– From bank balances 12,113 8,185
– From fixed deposits 212,453 110,788
– From other sources 2,799 3,914
– Late interest charges pertaining to trade receivables 8,270 5,876
246,613 135,352

31 December 2011
7. OTHER OPERATING INCOME

The following items have been included in arriving at other operating income:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Bad debts recovered 126 71

Compensation/penalty income 4,683 5,153
Dividend received from equity instruments 11,407 5,670
Gain on bargain purchase on business combinations 7,348 217
Gain on disposal of property, plant and equipment 10,817 9,063
Gain on liquidation of subsidiaries 613 –
Government grants/incentive income 20,099 15,719
Income from sales cancellation 1,581 1,752
Net foreign exchange gain, excluding net foreign exchange gain on
shareholders loan to subsidiaries 556,519 214,919
Processing fee income/tolling income 3,539 3,223
Rental and storage income 8,322 10,755
Fair value gain arising from step acquisition resulting in an associate
becoming a subsidiary – 1,288
Scrap sales 16,063 9,796
Service fees/management fees/commission income 4,775 3,950
Write back of allowance for doubtful receivables 425 9,759

31 December 2011
8. OTHER OPERATING EXPENSES

The following items have been included in arriving at other operating expenses:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Allowance for advances to suppliers 551 1,185

Amortisation of intangible assets 461 256
Bad debts written off (non-trade) 168 76
Compensation/penalty expenses 13,382 10,896
Fair value loss of derivative financial instruments 4,031 –
Grant of share options to employees 19,964 34,742
Impairment of property, plant and equipment 257 118
Inventories written off 487 968
Loss on liquidation/disposal of associates 1,333 2,368
Loss on disposal/liquidation of subsidiaries – 35
Pre-operating expenses 6,140 3,263
Positive goodwill arising from acquisition of subsidiaries written off 4 286
Project expenses 16,351 2,101
Services/management fees expenses 1,190 264
9. FINANCE COSTS
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Interest expense:
– Bank borrowings (including bank overdrafts) 492,489 204,125
– Convertible bonds (accretion of interest) 12,702 10,720
– Loans from associates 495 28
– Others 11,705 1,986
517,391 216,859
Less: Amount capitalised
– Biological assets (3,814) (4,210)
– Property, plant and equipment (7,781) (4,523)
505,796 208,126

31 December 2011
10. PROFIT BEFORE TAX

The following items have been included in arriving at profit before tax:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Fair value loss of embedded derivatives of convertible bonds (84,684) (27,180)

Net foreign exchange gain on shareholders loan to subsidiaries 26,479 48,727
Finance costs on bank borrowings for acquisition of Sucrogen Limited &
its subsidiaries (43,061) (339)
(Loss)/gain on disposal of available-for-sale financial assets (38) 19,876
Gain on disposal of financial assets held for trading 21,123 7,720
Investment income from available-for-sale financial assets 117 46,592
Net fair value (loss)/gain on financial assets held for trading (89,856) 20,090
Reversal of pre-acquistion hedging loss 65,885 –
Non-operating items (104,035) 115,486
Audit fees paid to:

– Auditors of the Company 494 522
– Other auditors 4,276 3,365
Non-audit fees paid to:

– Auditors of the Company 957 448
– Other auditors 391 447
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment: 480,342 318,681

Less: Amount capitalised as part of costs of biological assets (2,487) (3,446)
Add: Impairment loss 257 118
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment – net 478,112 315,353
Employee benefits expense 869,365 420,702

Operating lease expense 40,779 28,412

31 December 2011
11. INCOME TAX EXPENSE

(a) Major components of income tax expense
The major components of income tax expense for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2010 are:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Consolidated Income Statement

Current income tax
Current income taxation 349,898 257,029
Over provision in respect of previous years (18,930) (4,328)
330,968 252,701
Deferred income tax

Origination and reversal of temporary differences 43,771 (38,655)
Under/(over) provision in respect of previous years 4,480 (24,386)
Income tax expense recognised in the income statement 379,219 189,660
Deferred income tax related to other comprehensive income:

Net change in fair value of derivative financial instruments designated
as cash flow hedges (37,938) 11,682
(b) Relationship between tax expense and accounting profit

The reconciliation between tax expense and the product of accounting profit multiplied by the applicable corporate tax rates
for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2010 are as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Accounting profit before income tax 2,078,741 1,644,186
Tax calculated at tax rate of 17% (2010: 17%) 353,386 279,512

Adjustments:
Effect of different tax rates in other countries 150,448 116,614
Effect of tax incentives (101,767) (82,429)
Income not subject to taxation (59,283) (130,054)
Non-deductible expenses 57,250 32,863
Deferred tax assets not recognised 26,186 13,776
Over provision in respect of previous years (14,450) (28,714)
Share of results of associates (28,995) (6,766)
Others (3,556) (5,142)
Income tax expense recognised in the consolidated income statement 379,219 189,660

31 December 2011
12. EARNINGS PER SHARE

(a) Basic earnings per share
Basic earnings per share amounts are calculated by dividing net profit for the year attributable to owners of the parent by the
weighted average number of ordinary shares outstanding during the financial year.
Group
2011 2010
Profit, net of tax for the year attributable to owners of the parent (US$'000) 1,600,840 1,323,974
Weighted average number of ordinary shares ('000) 6,398,300 6,392,122
Basic earnings per share (US cents per share) 25.0 20.7
(b) Diluted earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share amounts are calculated by dividing net profit for the year attributable to owners of the parent
(after adjusting for the fair value and accretion of interest on convertible bonds) by the weighted average number of ordinary
shares outstanding during the financial year plus the weighted average number of ordinary shares that would be issued on the
conversion of all the dilutive potential ordinary shares into ordinary shares.
Group
2011 2010
Profit for the year attributable to owners of the parent (US$'000) 1,600,840 1,323,974
Weighted average number of ordinary shares ('000) 6,398,300 6,392,122

Effects of dilution
– Grant of equity-settled share options ('000) 3,808 7,499
Weighted average number of ordinary shares for
diluted earnings per share computation ('000) 6,402,108 6,399,621
Diluted earnings per share (US cents per share) 25.0 20.7
The fair value adjustments on embedded derivatives and accretion of interest on convertible bonds were not included in the
computation of diluted earnings per share for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2010 as the
conversion of convertible bonds was anti-dilutive.
Since the end of the financial year, executives of the Group have exercised options to acquire 243,000 (2010: 2,618,000) ordinary
shares. There have been no other transactions involving ordinary shares or potential ordinary shares since the reporting date and
before the completion of these financial statements.

31 December 2011
13. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Freehold Furniture, Motor
land, fittings vehicles,
land and Plant and and office trucks and Construction
land rights Buildings machineries equipment Vessels aircrafts in-progress Total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Group
Costs
At 1 January 2010 605,692 1,142,086 2,498,288 89,261 355,954 146,435 418,796 5,256,512
Acquisition of
subsidiaries, as
previously reported 65,205 199,189 1,213,076 7,233 16,318 1,199 151,580 1,653,800
Finalisation of purchase
price allocation 107,334 20,388 26,796 – – – – 154,518
Acquisition of
subsidiaries, as
restated 172,539 219,577 1,239,872 7,233 16,318 1,199 151,580 1,808,318
Liquidation of
subsidiaries – – – (11) – – – (11)
Additions 42,486 34,664 41,050 15,714 32,083 18,742 717,487 902,226
Disposals (1,364) (2,481) (16,370) (2,812) (105,494) (7,208) (772) (136,501)
Transfers 1,364 216,953 476,722 1,918 38,794 3,707 (739,458) –
Reclassification 2,486 11,494 (17,894) 7,570 (2,504) (709) (24,383) (23,940)
Currency translation
differences 20,518 31,877 59,019 2,354 983 2,290 7,660 124,701
At 31 December 2010,
as restated and
1 January 2011 843,721 1,654,170 4,280,687 121,227 336,134 164,456 530,910 7,931,305
Acquisition of
subsidiaries 22,434 30,470 101,135 319 – 426 98,513 253,297
Additions 86,407 73,073 103,563 19,393 17,002 23,976 1,093,761 1,417,175
Disposals (1,981) (4,928) (27,065) (1,851) (32,151) (6,011) (2,138) (76,125)
Transfers 2,580 250,450 357,363 3,091 18,521 1,235 (633,240) –
Reclassification 83 2,222 (6,307) 1,138 (11) 313 (1,687) (4,249)
differences 10,685 12,691 43,834 2,633 (7,612) 439 9,995 72,665
At 31 December 2011 963,929 2,018,148 4,853,210 145,950 331,883 184,834 1,096,114 9,594,068

31 December 2011
13. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (CONTINUED)

Freehold Furniture, Motor
land, fittings vehicles,
land and Plant and and office trucks and Construction
land rights Buildings machineries equipment Vessels aircrafts in-progress Total
Group
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2010 55,408 231,001 830,641 57,449 75,985 86,726 – 1,337,210
Liquidation of
subsidiaries – – – (11) – – – (11)
Depreciation charge for
the year 10,357 50,288 185,146 13,820 42,286 16,784 – 318,681
Disposals (159) (1,438) (11,312) (2,623) (12,515) (6,000) – (34,047)
Impairment loss 13 – 105 – – – – 118
Reclassification (50) (1,032) (1,678) 3,388 (604) (24) – –
differences 2,907 6,988 30,265 1,229 474 1,046 – 42,909
At 31 December 2010
and 1 January 2011 68,476 285,807 1,033,167 73,252 105,626 98,532 – 1,664,860
Depreciation charge
for the year 13,294 75,405 316,720 18,051 38,550 18,322 – 480,342
Disposals (333) (1,765) (11,020) (1,445) (20,879) (4,227) – (39,669)
Impairment loss – – 252 5 – – – 257
Reclassification (98) (559) 634 (10) – 25 – (8)
differences 751 6,914 16,719 1,888 (7,086) 211 – 19,397
At 31 December 2011 82,090 365,802 1,356,472 91,741 116,211 112,863 – 2,125,179
Net carrying amount

At 31 December 2010 775,245 1,368,363 3,247,520 47,975 230,508 65,924 530,910 6,266,445
At 31 December 2011 881,839 1,652,346 3,496,738 54,209 215,672 71,971 1,096,114 7,468,889

31 December 2011
13. PROPERTY, PLANT AND EQUIPMENT (CONTINUED)

Furniture,
fittings
and office Motor
equipment vehicles Total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Company
Costs
At 1 January 2010 4 – 4
Additions 16 154 170
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 20 154 174
Additions 1,312 183 1,495
Disposals – (154) (154)
At 31 December 2011 1,332 183 1,515
Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2010 – – –
Depreciation charge for the year 4 26 30
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 4 26 30
Depreciation charge for the year 231 2 233
Disposals – (26) (26)
At 31 December 2011 235 2 237
Net carrying amount

At 31 December 2010 16 128 144
At 31 December 2011 1,097 181 1,278
Capitalisation of borrowing costs

The Group’s property, plant and equipment includes borrowing costs arising from bank term loans borrowed specifically for the
purpose of the construction of plants. During the financial year, the borrowing costs capitalised as cost of plant and machineries
amounted to approximately US$7,781,000 (2010: US$4,523,000).
Assets held under finance lease

The carrying amount of motor vehicles held under finance lease at the balance sheet date was approximately US$29,000 (2010:
US$70,000).
Leased assets are pledged as security for the related finance lease liabilities.
Assets pledged as security

In addition to assets held under finance leases, certain property, plant and equipment of the Group amounting to approximately
US$329,901,000 (2010: US$407,854,000) are pledged as security for bank borrowings.

31 December 2011
14. BIOLOGICAL ASSETS

Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 1,512,209 1,153,535

Acquisition of subsidiaries 7,716 13,570
Additions 57,209 48,630
Disposals (5,310) (705)
Capitalisation of interest 3,814 4,210
Capitalisation of depreciation 2,487 3,446
Capitalisation of employee benefits 15,008 18,382
Currency translation differences (9,808) 20,124
1,583,325 1,261,192
Increase in fair value less point-of-sale costs 262,657 251,017
At 31 December 1,845,982 1,512,209
(a) Analysis of oil palm production

During the financial year, the Group harvested 4,072,961 tonnes (2010: 3,348,891 tonnes) of FFB, which had a fair value less
estimated point-of-sale costs of approximately US$804,157,000 (2010: US$580,117,000). The fair value of FFB was determined
with reference to their market prices during the year.
(b) Analysis of biological assets

At the end of the financial year, the Group’s total planted area and related value of mature and immature plantations are as
follows:
Group
2011 2010
Area Hectares Hectares
Planted area:
– Mature 209,811 190,499
– Immature 41,596 58,277
251,407 248,776
Group
2011 2010
Value US$’000 US$’000
Planted area:
– Mature 1,677,174 1,319,159
– Immature 168,808 193,050
1,845,982 1,512,209
* Mature planted area includes rubber and sugar cane plantations.

31 December 2011
14. BIOLOGICAL ASSETS (CONTINUED)

(c) t 31 December 2011, the fair value of biological assets of the Group mortgaged as securities for bank borrowings amounted to
A
approximately US$60,795,755 (2010: US$37,424,000).
(d)
The interest capitalised is actual interest incurred on the bank borrowings to finance the development of oil palm plantations.
(e)
The fair value of biological assets has been determined based on valuations by an independent professional valuer using
discounted cash flows of the underlying biological assets. The expected cash flows from the whole life cycle of the oil palm
plantations are determined using the market price and the estimated yield of FFB, net of maintenance and harvesting costs and
any costs required to bring the oil palm plantations to maturity. The estimated yield of the oil palm plantations is dependent on
the age of the oil palm trees, the location of the plantations, soil type and infrastructure. The market price of the FFB is largely
dependent on the prevailing market prices of crude palm oil and palm kernel. Point-of-sale costs include all costs that would be
necessary to sell the assets.
The valuations were based on the following significant assumptions:
(i) No new planting or replanting activities are assumed;
(ii) Oil palm trees have an average life of 25 (2010: 25) years, with the first three years as immature and remaining years
as mature;
(iii) Discount rate per annum of 7.92% to 13.19% (2010: 7.31% to 14.45%);
(iv) FFB selling price of US$147 to US$179 (2010: US$140 to US$157) per metric tonne; and
(v) Average yield is 19.8 (2010: 17.9) metric tonne per hectare.

31 December 2011
15. INTANGIBLE ASSETS

Trademarks
& Licenses
Goodwill and others Brand Total
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Group
Cost
At 1 January 2010 2,937,083 2,257 1,089,247 4,028,587
Additions, as previously reported 370,218 1,144 – 371,362
Finalisation of purchase price allocation (41,983)* – 12,378 (29,605)
Additions, as restated 328,235 1,144 12,378 341,757
Written off to income statement (286) – – (286)
Currency translation differences 1,283 14 – 1,297
At 31 December 2010, as restated and 1 January 2011 3,266,315 3,415 1,101,625 4,371,355
Additions 40,856# 1,662 – 42,518
Written off to income statement (4) (276) – (280)
Disposals – (84) – (84)
Currency translation differences (2,568) (119) – (2,687)
At 31 December 2011 3,304,599 4,598 1,101,625 4,410,822
Accumulated amortisation and impairment –

At 1 January 2010 – (151) – (151)
Amortisation during the year – (256) – (256)
Currency translation differences – (9) – (9)
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 – (416) – (416)
Amortisation during the year – (461) – (461)
Disposals – 1 – 1
Currency translation differences – (7) – (7)
At 31 December 2011 – (883) – (883)
Net carrying amount

At 31 December 2010 3,266,315 2,999 1,101,625 4,370,939
At 31 December 2011 3,304,599 3,715 1,101,625 4,409,939
* In accordance with FRS 103, the management has assessed the fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities at the date of acquisition. The purchase
price allocation was completed during the financial year. Accordingly, the provisional goodwill recognized in the prior year has now been adjusted retrospectively to reflect the
finalised carrying fair value.
# In accordance with FRS 103, the management is required to identify the fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities at the date of acquisition.
Valuation reviews for some of the acquisitions are in progress as at 31 December 2011. Accordingly, the provisional goodwill arising from these acquisitions are included in the
addition of goodwill for the year.

31 December 2011
15. INTANGIBLE ASSETS (CONTINUED)

Trademarks
and licenses Total
US$'000 US$'000
Company
Costs
At 1 January 2010 – –
Additions 794 794
At 31 December 2010, 1 January 2011 and 31 December 2011 794 794
Accumulated amortisation and impairment –

At 1 January 2010 – –
Amortisation during the year (133) (133)
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 (133) (133)
Amortisation during the year (264) (264)
At 31 December 2011 (397) (397)
Net carrying amount –

At 31 December 2010 661 661
At 31 December 2011 397 397

31 December 2011

Finalisation of purchase price allocation
The Group finalised the purchase price allocation for the acquisition of Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries during the financial year.
The retrospective adjustments to the provisional purchase price allocation were as follows:
Group
Previously
- reported Restated Adjustments
- US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Property, plant and equipment 6,111,927 6,266,445 154,518

Intangible assets 4,400,544 4,370,939 (29,605)
Investment in associates 1,269,656 1,263,659 (5,997)
Deferred tax assets 211,882 205,724 (6,158)
- 11,994,009 12,106,767 112,758
Trade receivables 3,125,919 3,118,558 (7,361)

Other financial receivables 1,310,707 1,315,439 4,732
Other non-financial assets 1,394,778 1,406,516 11,738
- 5,831,404 5,840,513 9,109
-
Other financial payables 789,729 806,014 16,285
Tax payables 105,876 110,688 4,812
Deferred tax liabilities 474,953 527,293 52,340
- 1,370,558 1,443,995 73,437
Net assets 16,454,855 16,503,285 48,430
Non-controlling interests 702,028 750,458 48,430
Amortisation expense
The amortisation of trademarks & licenses and others is included in other operating expenses in the consolidated income statement.
Brand
Brand relates to both the ‘Arawana’ and ‘CSR’ brand names that were acquired in 2007 and 2010 respectively. As explained in
Note 2.11(b)(i), the useful life of the brand is estimated to be indefinite.
Impairment testing of goodwill and brand

Goodwill arising from business combinations and brand has been allocated to individual cash-generating units (“CGU”) for
impairment testing.

31 December 2011

The carrying amounts of goodwill and brand allocated to each CGU are as follows:
Merchandising and Consumer Plantations and Palm

Processing Segment Products Segment Oil Mills Segment Sugar Segment
Palm and Oilseeds Merchandising Total
Laurics and Grains Milling and Processing Others Segment
2011
Goodwill 608,375 737,042 28,986 1,596,605 210,960 112,099 10,532 3,304,599
Brand – – 1,089,247 – – 12,378 – 1,101,625
2010
Restated*
Goodwill 602,312 1,028,159 28,986 1,597,870 – – 8,988 3,266,315
Brand – 12,378 1,089,247 – – – – 1,101,625
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year’s figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition of Sucrogen
Limited and its subsidiaries (Note 15).
The recoverable amounts of the CGUs have been determined based on value in use calculations using cash flow projections from
financial budgets approved by management covering a five-year period for consumer products, merchandising and processing,
sugar milling and sugar merchandising and processing segments. For plantation and palm oil mills, management has used cash flow
projections based on the age of the plantations. The pre-tax discount rate applied to the cash flow projections and the forecasted
growth rates used to extrapolate cash flow beyond the five-year period are as follows:
Merchandising and Consumer Plantations and Palm

Processing Segment Products Segment Oil Mills Segment Sugar Segment
Palm and Oilseeds Merchandising
Laurics and Grains Milling and Processing
% % % % % %
2011
Terminal growth rates 2.0-3.0 3.0 3.0 N.A. 2.5 2.0-2.5
Pre-tax discount rates 12.0-14.0 14.0 12.0 12.0 9.8 9.8-12.0
2010
Terminal growth rates 3.0 3.0 3.0 N.A. N.A. N.A.
Pre-tax discount rates 14.0 14.0 12.0 12.0 N.A. N.A.

31 December 2011

These assumptions were used for the analysis of each CGU within the business segment. Management determined budgeted gross
margin based on past performance and its expectations of the market development. The discount rates used were pre-tax and
reflected specific risks relating to the relevant segments. The forecasted growth rates are based on published industry research and do
not exceed the long term average growth rate for the industries relevant to the CGU.
16. INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES

Company
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Unquoted equity shares, at cost 8,697,067 8,680,663
Details of the list of significant subsidiaries are included in Note 39.
Acquisition of subsidiaries and business

The Group acquired the following subsidiaries and business during the financial year:
Equity
interest Month of
Name of subsidiaries and business acquired acquired Consideration acquisition
% US$'000
Benso Oil Palm Plantation Limited 77+ 16,755 March 2011

PT Anugrah Rejeki Nusantara 95 12,923 June 2011
Jiangsu Spring Fruit Biological Products Co., Ltd 60 8,349 August 2011
Yihai Kerry (Shanghai) Sugar Co., Ltd 78 1,252 August 2011
PT Duta Sugar International 95 23,068 August 2011
62,347
Proserpine Sugar Mill acquired from Proserpine Co-operative Sugar Milling
Association Limited 121,594 December 2011
183,941
+
The equity interest acquired has been rounded to the nearest whole % as indicated.

31 December 2011
16. INVESTMENT IN SUBSIDIARIES (CONTINUED)

The fair values of the identifiable assets and liabilities of subsidiaries acquired and the effect thereof as at the date of above acquisition
were as follows:
Fair value
recognised
on acquisition
US$'000
Property, plant and equipment 253,297

Biological assets 7,716
Deferred tax assets 1,458
Trade and other receivables 181,126
Cash and cash equivalents 15,430
459,027
Trade and other payables 157,464

Loans and borrowings 83,529
240,993
Net identifiable assets 218,034

Less: Non-controlling interests measured at the non-controlling interest's proportionate share
of net identifiable assets (40,208)
Identifiable net assets acquired 177,826
Less: Transfer from investment in an associate (27,393)
150,433
Positive goodwill arising from acquisition recognised as part of intangible assets 40,852
Positive goodwill written off 4
Gain on bargain purchase taken to the other operating income (7,348)
Total consideration for acquisition 183,941

31 December 2011

Total cost of business combination
The total cost of the business combination is as follows:
Cashflow on
acquisition
US$'000
Consideration for acquisition 183,941

Less: Payables for acquisition (2,148)
Consideration for acquisition – cash paid 181,793
The effects of acquisition on cash flow is as follows:

Consideration settled in cash 181,793
Less: Cash and cash equivalents of subsidiaries/business acquired (15,430)
Less: Adjustments of consideration for acquisition of subsidiaries in prior year (2,077)
Net cash outflow on acquisition 164,286
Transaction costs
Transaction costs related to the above acquisitions of approximately US$6,676,000 have been recognised in the other operating
expenses in the consolidated income statement for the financial year ended 31 December 2011.
Impact of acquisition on consolidated income statement

From the date of acquisition, the acquirees have contributed an additional revenue and profit of approximately US$126,389,000 and
US$881,000 respectively for the financial year ended 31 December 2011. If the combination had taken place at the beginning of the
financial year, the Group’s revenue would have been approximately US$44,858,126,000 and profit would have been approximately
US$1,605,824,000.

31 December 2011

Acquisition of non-controlling interests
During the year, the Group acquired additional interest in the following subsidiaries from the existing non-controlling shareholders:
Proportion of Premium/

ownership (discount)
interest after arising
Additional additional Book from Month of
Acquirer Acquiree interest acquisition* Consideration value acquisition acquisition
% % US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Newbloom Pte. Ltd. PT Maju Perkasasawit 10 100 300 236 64 January
2011
Newbloom Pte. Ltd. PT Jammer Tulen 10 100 1,000 947 53 January
2011
Newbloom Pte. Ltd. PT Asiatic Persada 49 100 33,700 37,070 (3,370) January
2011
Tradesound Investments Cleartech Research Pte. Ltd. 40 100 20 16 4 August
Limited 2011
Yihai Kerry Investments Xi’an Kerry Oils & Fats 9 98+ 2,370 2,141 229 September
Co., Ltd. Industrial Ltd 2011
Yihai Kerry Investments Yihai Kerry (Jilin) Oils, 12 98+ 949 (288) 1,237 October
Co., Ltd. Grains & Foodstuffs 2011
Industries Co., Ltd
Yihai Kerry Investments Yihai Kerry (Baicheng) Oils, 12 98+ 1,518 1,547 (29) November
Co., Ltd. Grains & Foodstuffs 2011
Industries Co., Ltd
Wilmar Seed Investments Hebei Yihai Angenuo 20 98+ 822 645 177 November
Pte. Ltd. Agrochemical Co., Ltd 2011
* Based on the Group's effective interest in the acquiree

The effective interest of the Group has been rounded to the nearest whole % as indicated.
+

31 December 2011
17. INVESTMENT IN ASSOCIATES

Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Shares, at cost 980,800 805,337 90,732 89,883

Share of post-acquisition reserves 430,915 298,232 – –
Share of associates' other comprehensive income 918 918 – –
Currency translation differences 55,147 48,206 – –
1,467,780 1,152,693 90,732 89,883
Quasi equity loans 110,966 110,966 110,966 110,966
1,578,746 1,263,659 201,698 200,849
Fair value of investment in associates for

which there are published price quotations 78,962 112,395 21,560 32,032
Details of the list of significant associates are included in Note 40.
The summarised financial information of the associates, not adjusted for the proportion of ownership interest held by the Group, is
as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Assets and liabilities: –

Current assets 6,999,725 6,193,661
Non-current assets 2,572,296 1,913,579
Total assets 9,572,021 8,107,240
Current liabilities 5,849,731 4,640,109

Non-current liabilities 838,940 681,198
Total liabilities 6,688,671 5,321,307
Results:
Revenue 15,532,402 9,174,282
Profit for the year 498,507 55,409

31 December 2011
18. AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS

FINANCIAL ASSETS HELD FOR TRADING
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Available-for-sale financial assets

Non-current:
Quoted equity instruments* 78,636 70,650 – –
Unquoted equity instruments, at cost 59,156 59,171 36,000 36,000
Unquoted non-equity instruments 56,051 14,004 – –
193,843 143,825 36,000 36,000
Current:
Unquoted non-equity instruments – 3,010 – –
– 3,010 – –
Financial assets held for trading

Quoted equity instruments 223,239 281,842 – –
Quoted non-equity instruments 110,476 34,459 – –
333,715 316,301 – –
* Included in the quoted equity instruments is an investment in shares quoted on National Stock Exchange of Australia. As the sale and purchase of this investment is restricted by
Sugar Terminals Limited, the valuation is determined using discounted cash flow projections.
The Group’s non-equity investments comprise investment in bonds and investment funds.
Unquoted equity instruments are valued at cost as these instruments have no market prices and the fair value cannot be reliably
measured using valuation techniques.

31 December 2011
19. DEFERRED TAX
Group
Consolidated Consolidated
balance sheet Income statement
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Deferred tax assets:

Provisions 87,974 60,591 (24,087) (12,577)
Unutilised tax losses 83,072 68,918 (25,301) (20,982)
Differences in depreciation for tax purposes 16,510 16,393 880 2,869
Fair value adjustments on derivatives classified
as cash flow hedges 4,113 44,116 – –
Other items 35,196 15,706 (9,455) (11,311)
226,865 205,724
Deferred tax liabilities:

Differences in depreciation for tax purposes 147,008 144,256 4,191 (19,185)
Fair value adjustments on acquisition of subsidiaries 69,279 68,925 (2,092) –
as cash flow hedges 64,713 52,782 – –
as fair value hedges 339 3,704 (3,365) 3,704
Fair value adjustments on biological assets 280,746 211,848 68,898 61,415
Undistributed earnings 28,890 24,899 3,991 (57,001)
Other items 48,447 20,879 34,591 (9,973)
639,422 527,293
Deferred income tax expense/(credit) 48,251 (63,041)
Tax consequences of proposed dividends

There are no income tax consequences attached to the dividends to the shareholders proposed by the Company but not recognised
as a liability in the financial statements for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2010 respectively.
Unrecognised tax losses

At the balance sheet date, the Group has tax losses of approximately US$201,361,000 (2010: US$158,290,000) that are available for
offset against future taxable profits of the companies in which the losses arose, for which no deferred tax asset is recognised due to
the uncertainty of its recoverability. The use of these tax losses is subject to the agreement of the tax authorities and compliance with
certain provisions of the tax legislation of the respective countries in which the companies operate.

31 December 2011
19. DEFERRED TAX (CONTINUED)

Unrecognised temporary differences relating to investments in subsidiaries
At the balance sheet date, no deferred tax liability (2010: US$Nil) has been recognised for taxes that would be payable on the
undistributed earnings of certain of the Group’s subsidiaries as the Group has determined that undistributed earnings of its subsidiaries
will not be distributed in the foreseeable future.
Such temporary differences for which no deferred tax liability has been recognised aggregate to approximately US$2,275,709,000
(2010: US$1,837,699,000). The deferred tax liability is estimated to be approximately US$286,341,000 (2010: US$209,191,000).
20. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

Group
2011 2010
Contract/ Contract/
Notional Notional
amount Assets Liabilities amount Assets Liabilities
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Forward currency contracts 15,857,690 101,999 130,358 13,141,436 146,715 147,091

Futures, options and swap contracts 4,329,959 131,129 157,346 5,812,521 245,645 556,845
Interest rate swap 145,408 216 669 60,126 – 832
Forward freight agreements 23,165 8,815 – 23,165 3,828 –
Fair value of embedded derivatives of
convertible bonds – 330 – – 85,014 –
Fair value of firm commitment contracts 430,126 20,525 18,086 – – –
Total derivative financial instruments 263,014 306,459 481,202 704,768
Less: Current portion (239,354) (263,402) (350,091) (629,534)
Non-current portion 23,660 43,057 131,111 75,234
Company
2011 2010
Contract/ Contract/
Notional Notional
amount Assets Liabilities amount Assets Liabilities
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Fair value of embedded derivatives of

convertible bonds – 330 – – 85,014 –
Total derivative financial instruments 330 – 85,014 –
Less: Current portion (330) – – –
Non-current portion – – 85,014 –

31 December 2011
20. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

The Group classifies derivative financial instruments as financial assets/liabilities at fair value through profit or loss. Other than those
designated as hedges of commodity products, the Group does not apply hedge accounting.
Cash flow hedges

Hedges of future purchase and sales of commodity products
The Group enters into various commodities futures, options and swap and forward currency contracts in order to hedge the financial
risks related to the purchase and sales of commodity products. The Group has applied cash flow hedge accounting to these derivatives
as they are considered to be highly effective hedging instruments. A net fair value gain/(loss) of approximately US$31,151,000
(2010: US$(77,556,000)), with related deferred tax (charges)/credit of approximately US$(8,260,000) (2010: US$3,971,000), is included in
the hedging reserve in respect of these contracts.
The cash flows arising from these derivatives are expected to occur and enter into the determination of profit or loss during the next
three financial years as follows: US$31,660,000, US$(2,778,000) and US$2,269,000 (2010: US$(77,556,000), US$Nil and US$Nil).
Fair value hedges

The Group enters into commodities future contracts to hedge the financial risk related to the carrying value of commodity products.
A net fair value loss of approximately US$6,790,000 (2010: US$74,079,000) is deferred in the income statement and offset with a similar
gain on the inventory.

31 December 2011
21. OTHER FINANCIAL RECEIVABLES

OTHER NON-FINANCIAL ASSETS
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Non-current:
Other non-trade receivables 12,135 17,629 14 14
Other deposits with financial institutions – 53,453 – –
Amount due from subsidiaries – non-trade – – 100,612 88,230
Amount due from associates – non-trade 67,966 35,728 28,847 16,610
Other financial receivables 80,101 106,810 129,473 104,854
Current:
Deposits 13,011 129,019 7 1
Loans to non-controlling shareholders of subsidiaries 25,469 2,581 – –
Other non-trade receivables 336,363 226,972 1,749 3,821
Other deposits with financial institutions 2,460,807 675,620 – –
Amount due from subsidiaries – non-trade – – 1,771,476 2,849,748
Amount due from associates – non-trade 293,547 254,454 18,548 40,398
Amount due from related parties – non-trade 26,926 26,793 – –
Other financial receivables 3,156,123 1,315,439 1,791,780 2,893,968
Non-current:
Prepayments 38,504 50,030 – –
Other non-financial assets 38,504 50,030 – –
Current:
Prepayments and other non-financial assets 189,402 154,781 520 110
Tax recoverables 83,062 60,695 – –
Advances for property, plant and equipment 400,070 238,516 1,147 1,176
Advances for acquisition of a subsidiary 74,076 22,000 – –
Advances to suppliers 622,345 930,524 – –
Other non-financial assets 1,368,955 1,406,516 1,667 1,286
Amount due from subsidiaries and associates (non-current)

The non-current non-trade receivables from subsidiaries and associates are unsecured, bear interests at 1.5% above 1 year LIBOR rate
and have no fixed terms of repayment. These balances are not expected to be repaid within the next twelve months and are expected
to be settled in cash.

31 December 2011
21. OTHER FINANCIAL RECEIVABLES

OTHER NON-FINANCIAL ASSETS (CONTINUED)
Amount due from subsidiaries, associates and related parties (current)
The current non-trade receivables from subsidiaries, associates and related parties are unsecured, non-interest bearing and repayable
on demand except for amounts due from associates of approximately US$153,935,000 (2010: US$125,237,000), which bear interest
ranging from 0.1% to 9.0% (2010: 3% to 8%) per annum and are expected to be settled in cash.
Loans to non-controlling shareholders of two subsidiaries

Loans to non-controlling shareholders of two subsidiaries are repayable on demand and are expected to be settled in cash. These
loans are secured over the non-controlling shareholders’ interests in the subsidiaries.
Other deposits with financial institutions

Other deposits with financial institutions are deposits placed with reputable banks with high credit ratings and no history of default.
The interest rates range from 2% to 7% (2010: 2% to 4%) per annum.
22. INVENTORIES
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Balance Sheet
At cost:
Raw materials 2,364,027 2,897,290
Consumables 358,238 402,031
Finished goods 1,724,884 1,893,287
Stock in transit 420,560 581,346
4,867,709 5,773,954
At net realisable value:

Raw materials 599,728 231,789
Consumables 2,097 1,079
Finished goods 1,795,766 730,547
2,397,591 963,415
7,265,300 6,737,369
Income Statement
Inventories recognised as an expense in cost of sales 37,340,408 25,044,779
– Additional/(write back of) provision for net realisable value 102,700 (10,813)
The Group has pledged inventories amounting to approximately US$318,571,000 (2010: US$349,222,000) as security for bank
borrowings.

31 December 2011
23. TRADE RECEIVABLES

Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Trade receivables 2,477,670 2,249,150

Notes receivables 267,225 186,899
Value added tax recoverable 543,793 424,997
Amount due from associates – trade 191,574 244,015
Amount due from related parties – trade 43,104 22,953
3,523,366 3,128,014
Less: Allowance for doubtful receivables (20,441) (9,456)
3,502,925 3,118,558
Trade receivables, including amounts due from associates and related parties, are non-interest bearing and the average turnover is
28 days (2010: 28 days). They are recognised at their original invoice amounts which represent their fair values on initial recognition.
Notes receivables are non-interest bearing and have a maturity period ranging from 1 to 180 days for the financial years ended 31
December 2011 and 31 December 2010.
The Group has pledged trade receivables amounting to approximately US$82,678,000 (2010: US$65,470,000) as security for bank
borrowings.
Trade receivables that are past due but not impaired

The Group has trade receivables amounting to approximately US$415,797,000 (2010: US$423,613,000) that are past due at the balance
sheet date but not impaired. These receivables are unsecured and the analysis of their aging at the balance sheet date is as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Trade receivables past due but not impaired:

Less than 30 days 263,862 219,814
30 – 60 days 58,079 93,029
61 – 90 days 18,823 44,795
91 – 120 days 12,461 13,977
More than 120 days 62,572 51,998
415,797 423,613

31 December 2011
23. TRADE RECEIVABLES (CONTINUED)

Trade receivables that are impaired
The Group’s trade receivables that are impaired at the balance sheet date and the movement of the allowance accounts used to record
the impairment are as follows:
Movement in allowance account:
Group
Individually
Impaired
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January (9,456) (16,543)

(Addition)/write back of allowance during the year (15,217) 8,472
Acquisition of subsidiaries (156) (2,069)
Bad debts written off against allowance 4,268 730
Currency translation differences 120 (46)
At 31 December (20,441) (9,456)
The above trade receivables that are individually determined to be impaired at the balance sheet date relate to debtors that are
in significant financial difficulties and have defaulted on payments. These receivables are not secured by any collateral or credit
enhancements.
Loans and receivables
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Trade receivables 3,502,925 3,118,558 – –

Other financial receivables – current 3,156,123 1,315,439 1,791,780 2,893,968
Other financial receivables – non-current 80,101 106,810 129,473 104,854
Total cash and bank balances 7,898,353 6,787,812 3,243 3,450
Loans and receivables 14,637,502 11,328,619 1,924,496 3,002,272

31 December 2011
24. OTHER BANK DEPOSITS

CASH AND BANK BALANCES
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Fixed deposits pledged with financial institutions for bank facilities 6,441,096 5,707,888
Other deposits with maturity more than 3 months 80,474 187,426
Other bank deposits 6,521,570 5,895,314
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Cash at banks and on hand 1,194,139 776,106 3,243 3,164

Short term and other deposits 182,644 116,392 – 286
Cash and bank balances 1,376,783 892,498 3,243 3,450
Cash at banks earns interest at floating rates based on daily bank deposit rates. Short-term deposits are made for varying periods of
between one day and three months depending on the cash requirements of the Group and the Company, and earn interests at the
respective short-term deposit rates. The weighted average effective interest rate of the Group and the Company is 3% (2010: 2%) per
annum and 1% (2010: less than 1%) per annum respectively.
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Other bank deposits 6,521,570 5,895,314 – –

Cash and bank balances 1,376,783 892,498 3,243 3,450
Total cash and bank balances 7,898,353 6,787,812 3,243 3,450
For the purpose of the consolidated cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise the following at the balance sheet date:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Cash and bank balances 1,376,783 892,498

Bank overdrafts (97,125) (492,023)
Cash and cash equivalents 1,279,658 400,475

31 December 2011
25. TRADE PAYABLES

Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Trade payables 1,277,753 981,037

Value added tax payable 28,178 50,075
Due to associates – trade 110,143 152,215
Due to related parties – trade 293,930 263,861
1,710,004 1,447,188
Trade payables are non-interest bearing and the average turnover is 12 days (2010: 12 days).
Total financial liabilities
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Trade payables 1,710,004 1,447,188 – –

Other financial payables – current 1,131,337 806,014 24,448 588,807
Other financial payables – non-current 4,691 4,274 – –
Loans and borrowings 20,888,943 17,425,187 558,417 1,054,216
Total financial liabilities carried at amortised cost 23,734,975 19,682,663 582,865 1,643,023

31 December 2011
26. OTHER FINANCIAL PAYABLES

OTHER NON-FINANCIAL LIABILITIES
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Current:
Advances from non-controlling shareholders of subsidiaries 58,884 29,158 – –
Accrued operating expenses 557,993 475,000 10,131 13,186
Due to subsidiaries – non-trade – – 12,891 556,474
Due to associates – non-trade 50,081 31,164 1,242 19,147
Due to related parties – non-trade 7,825 6,380 92 –
Deposits from third parties 84,570 64,985 – –
Payable for property, plant and equipment 99,919 56,094 – –
Other tax payables 26,050 17,949 – –
Other payables 246,015 125,284 92 –
Other financial payables 1,131,337 806,014 24,448 588,807
Non-current:
Advances from non-controlling shareholders of subsidiaries 3,680 3,607 – –
Other payables 1,011 667 – –
Other financial payables 4,691 4,274 – –
Current:
Advances from customers 469,834 393,334 – –
Other non-financial liabilities 469,834 393,334 – –
Non-current:
Provision for employee gratuity 39,339 31,014 – –
Deferred income – government grants 55,273 35,214 – –
Other non-financial liabilities 94,612 66,228 – –
Other payables include wages and employee taxes and other creditors.
The current amounts due to subsidiaries, associates and related parties are unsecured, non-interest bearing, repayable on demand
and are expected to be settled in cash.
The advances from non-controlling shareholders are unsecured, non-interest bearing and are expected to be settled in cash.
There are no unfulfilled conditions or contingencies attached to the deferred government grants.

31 December 2011
27. LOANS AND BORROWINGS

Weighted average
interest rate Group Company
Note Maturity 2011 2010 2011 2010 2011 2010
% % US$’000 US$’000 US$’000 US$’000
Current:
Bank term loans (a) 2012 2 1 1,998,587 790,268 – –
Short term/pre-shipment
loans (a) 2012 3 2 10,724,560 9,185,347 – 508,500
Trust receipts/bill
discounts (a) 2012 1 –* 5,030,366 4,435,961 – –
Bank overdrafts (b) 2012 5 5 97,125 492,023 – –
Obligations under
finance lease 2012 6 6 15 32 – –
Convertible bonds (c) 2012 4 – 558,417 – 558,417 –
18,409,070 14,903,631 558,417 508,500
Non-current:
Bank term loans (a) 2013-2018 2 1 2,479,851 1,975,800 – –
Convertible bonds (c) 2012 – 4 – 545,716 – 545,716
Obligations under
finance lease 2013-2015 6 6 22 40 – –
2,479,873 2,521,556 – 545,716
Total loans and

borrowings 20,888,943 17,425,187 558,417 1,054,216
* Weighted average interest rate is less than 1%.
The terms and conditions and securities for interest bearing loans and borrowings are as follows:
(a) Bank term loans/short term/pre-shipment loans/trust receipts/bill discounts

A portion of the Group’s loans are secured by a pledge over property, plant and equipment, biological assets, fixed deposits,
trade receivables, inventories and corporate guarantees from the Company and certain subsidiaries.
(b) Bank overdrafts

Certain bank overdrafts are secured by inventories, accounts receivables and corporate guarantees from the Company.

31 December 2011
27. LOANS AND BORROWINGS (CONTINUED)

(c) Convertible bonds
On 18 December 2007, the Company issued a zero coupon convertible bond denominated in US Dollars with a nominal
value of US$600,000,000. The bond will mature 5 years from the issue date at their nominal value of US$600,000,000 or can be
convertible on or after 27 January 2008 up to the seventh day prior to 18 December 2012 into fully paid ordinary shares of the
Company at an initial conversion price of S$5.38 per share with a fixed exchange rate of S$1.4451 to US$1.00. The conversion
price is subject to adjustment in the circumstances described under “Term and Conditions of Bonds - Conversion” in the circular
dated 17 December 2007.
The fair value of the liability component, included in loans and borrowings, is calculated using a market interest rate for an
equivalent non-convertible bond at the date of issue. The fair value of embedded derivative, which represents the Mandatory
Conversion in the hands of the Company, which allows it to mandatorily convert the outstanding bonds into shares under certain
prescribed conditions, is calculated based on the valuation model disclosed in Note 34. The residual amount after deducting
the embedded derivative and liability, representing the value of the equity conversion component, is included in shareholders’
equity in capital reserves.
The carrying amount of the liability component of the convertible bonds at the balance sheet date is derived as follows:
Group and Company

2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Face value of convertible bonds issued on 18 December 2007 600,000 600,000

Fair value of embedded derivatives at issuance date 26,883 26,883
Equity component at inception (84,520) (84,520)
Accretion of interests 40,409 27,708
Conversion to ordinary shares (1,425) (1,425)
Convertible bonds buy back (22,930) (22,930)
Liability component of convertible bonds at the balance sheet date 558,417 545,716
(d)
The bank facilities, up to a limit of approximately US$5,056,857,000 (2010: US$2,614,648,000), are guaranteed by the Company
and certain subsidiaries.

31 December 2011
28. SHARE CAPITAL

Group Company
Number Number
of shares of shares
'000 US$'000 '000 US$'000
At 1 January 2010 6,390,121 8,414,355 6,390,121 8,850,494

Shares arising from exercise of share options 6,428 18,892 6,428 18,892
Shares arising from conversion of convertible bonds 376 1,521 376 1,521
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 6,396,925 8,434,768 6,396,925 8,870,907
Shares arising from exercise of share options 4,503 16,753 4,503 16,753
At 31 December 2011 6,401,428 8,451,521 6,401,428 8,887,660
The holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive dividends as and when declared by the Company. All ordinary shares carry one
vote per share without restrictions. The ordinary shares have no par value. All the above issued ordinary shares are fully paid.
The Company has granted options to both Directors and the employees of the Group and the convertible bondholders to subscribe
for the Company’s ordinary shares.
29. OTHER RESERVES

(a) Composition:
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Capital reserve 145,383 145,383 145,379 145,379

Merger reserve (1,929,314) (1,929,314) – –
Foreign currency translation reserve 437,647 363,133 – –
General reserve 190,531 151,558 – –
Equity transaction reserve (4,005) (5,666) – –
Hedging reserve 31,151 (77,556) – –
Employee share option reserve 54,351 39,987 54,351 39,987
Fair value reserve (18,674) 3,989 – –
Total other reserves (1,092,930) (1,308,486) 199,730 185,366

31 December 2011
29. OTHER RESERVES (CONTINUED)

(b) Movements:
(i) Capital reserve
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 145,383 145,577 145,379 145,577

Equity component of convertible bonds
transferred to share capital – (198) – (198)
Share of associates' other comprehensive income – 4 – –
At 31 December 145,383 145,383 145,379 145,379
Equity component of convertible bonds represents the residual amount included in shareholders' equity in capital reserves.
(ii) Merger reserve
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January and 31 December (1,929,314) (1,929,314)
Merger reserve represents the difference between the consideration paid and the share capital of the subsidiaries under
the acquisition of all Wilmar Holdings Pte Ltd’s ("WHPL") interests in its subsidiaries and associated companies, save for its
interests in the Company, and shares owned by Archer Daniels Midland Asia-Pacific Limited ("ADM") and/or its affiliated
companies ("ADM Group") in companies where ADM Group holds shares with WHPL, together with non-controlling
interests held by WHPL in certain subsidiaries of the Company ("IPT Assets"). The above transaction was accounted for
using the pooling-of-interest method in 2007.
(iii) Foreign currency translation reserve
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 363,133 190,270

Currency translation differences of foreign operations 75,120 172,833
Disposal of subsidiaries (606) 30
At 31 December 437,647 363,133

31 December 2011

(b) Movements (continued):
(iv) General reserves
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 151,558 120,242

Transfer from retained earnings 38,973 31,316
At 31 December 190,531 151,558
(a) In accordance with the "Law of the People's Republic of China on Joint Ventures Using Chinese and Foreign
Investment" and the Group's China subsidiaries' Articles of Association, appropriations from net profit should be
made to the Reserve Fund and the Enterprise Expansion Fund, after offsetting accumulated losses from prior years,
and before profit distributions to the investors. The percentage to be appropriated to the Reserve Fund and the
Enterprise Expansion Fund are determined by the board of directors of the China subsidiaries.
(b) In accordance with “The Law of Republic of Indonesia” No. 40/2007, a certain amount from net earnings must be
allocated to Reserve Fund. The percentage to be allocated to Reserve Fund is determined by the General Meeting of
the shareholders.
(v) Equity transaction reserve
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January (5,666) –
Acquisition of additional interest in subsidiaries 1,661 (4,777)
Dilution of interest in subsidiaries – (889)
At 31 December (4,005) (5,666)
(vi) Hedging reserve
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January (77,556) 147,868

Fair value adjustment on cash flow hedges 27,216 (128,739)
Recognised in the income statement on derivatives contracts realised 81,491 (96,685)
At 31 December 31,151 (77,556)
Hedging reserve represents the cumulative fair value changes, net of tax, of the derivatives contracts designated as cash
flow hedges.

31 December 2011

(b) Movements (continued):
(vii) Employee share option reserve
Group and Company

2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 39,987 11,746

Grant of equity-settled share options 19,964 34,742
Exercise of equity-settled share options (5,600) (6,501)
At 31 December 54,351 39,987
Employee share option reserve represents the equity-settled share options granted to employees. The reserve is made
up of the cumulative value of services received from employees recorded over the vesting period commencing from the
grant date of equity-settled share options, and is reduced by the expiry or exercise of the share options.
(viii) Fair value reserve
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 3,989 8,833 – 13,685

Fair value adjustment on available-for-sale
financial assets (22,663) (4,844) – (13,685)
At 31 December (18,674) 3,989 – –
Fair value reserve represents the cumulative fair value changes, net of tax, of available-for-sale financial assets until they
are disposed of or impaired.
30. PROVISION FOR EMPLOYEE GRATUITY

The Group recognises provision for employee gratuity in accordance with Indonesia Labour Law No. 13/2003 dated 25 March 2003.
The provision is based on an actuarial calculation by an independent actuary using the “Projected Unit Credit Actuarial Valuation
Method”. Actuarial gains or losses are recognised as income or expenses when the net cumulative unrecognised actuarial gains or
losses exceed 10% of the higher of the defined benefit obligation and the fair value of plan assets at that date. These gains or losses
are recognised over the expected remaining working lives of employees. Past service cost is amortised over the remaining working
lives of each employee.

31 December 2011
30. PROVISION FOR EMPLOYEE GRATUITY (CONTINUED)

The estimated liabilities for employee gratuity based on the actuarial report have been determined using the following assumptions:
Group
2011 2010
Discount rate 6.85% per annum 8.5% per annum

Wages and salaries increase 8% - 10% per annum 8% - 10% per annum
Retirement age 55 years of age 55 years of age
Mortality rate CSO - 1980 CSO - 1980/TMI - 99
Method Projected unit credit Projected unit credit
The details of the employee gratuity expense recognised in the income statement are as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Current service costs 6,611 5,804

Adjustment of new entrant employees 1,207 1,968
Interest costs 3,446 2,399
Curtailment loss (1,594) (1,391)
Immediate recognition of past service cost (31) 132
Others 938 44
10,577 8,956
The details of the provision for employee gratuity at the balance sheet date are as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Present value of benefit obligation 48,731 42,573

Unamortised service cost (413) (156)
Unrecognised actuarial loss (8,979) (11,403)
Provision for employee gratuity 39,339 31,014

31 December 2011
30. PROVISION FOR EMPLOYEE GRATUITY (CONTINUED)

Movement in provision for employee gratuity is as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
At 1 January 31,014 20,551

Acquisition of subsidiaries 95 1,547
Provision made for the year 10,577 8,956
Payments during the year (2,028) (990)
Others (36) –
Currency translation differences (283) 950
At 31 December 39,339 31,014
31. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS

Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Employee benefits expense (including directors):

Salaries and bonuses 735,933 318,547
Defined contribution plans 54,509 37,132
Share-based payments 19,964 34,742
Other short term benefits 63,379 39,465
Other long term benefits 10,588 9,198
884,373 439,084
Less: Amount capitalised as biological assets (15,008) (18,382)
869,365 420,702
Share option schemes

Wilmar ESOS 2000
Under the Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2000 (“Wilmar ESOS 2000”), approved by shareholders on 30 June 2000, share
options are granted to eligible executives selected by the Remuneration Committee. The exercise price of the options is equal to the
average of the closing prices of the Company’s shares on the Singapore Exchange Securities Trading Limited (“SGX-ST”) on the five
consecutive trading days immediately preceding the date of the grant of that option (“Market Price”) or at a discount to the Market
Price (up to a maximum of 20%). The number of shares in respect of which options may be granted when aggregated with those
granted under any other share option schemes of the Company and for the time being in force, shall not exceed 15% of the issued
share capital of the Company on the date preceding the date of the relevant grant. There are no cash settlement alternatives.

31 December 2011
31. EMPLOYEE BENEFITS (CONTINUED)

Share option schemes (continued)
Wilmar ESOS 2000 (continued)
A total of 18,170,000 share options were granted in 2008 to executives of the Group. The options are valid for a term of five years from
the date of grant and are exercisable in the following manner:

• After 2nd anniversary of the date of grant – the remaining 50% of options granted
As at end of December 2011, options to subscribe for 4,131,000 shares remained outstanding. No options had been granted in 2011
under the Wilmar ESOS 2000 which was terminated with effect from 29 April 2009. Outstanding options under Wilmar ESOS 2000
remain valid until the respective expiry dates of the options.
Wilmar ESOS 2009

The Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009 (“Wilmar ESOS 2009”) was approved by the shareholders at an Extraordinary General
Meeting on 29 April 2009. This new scheme was adopted in substitution of the Wilmar ESOS 2000.
Under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, the option entitles eligible participants to subscribe for ordinary shares in the Company at a price
equal to the average of the closing prices of the Company’s shares on SGX-ST on the five trading days immediately preceding the
date of the grant of the option (“Market Price”) or at discount to the Market Price (up to maximum of 20%).
The maximum number of shares (in respect of the options) that may be granted under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, after taking into account
of (i) the total number of new shares issued and issuable in respect of all other share-based incentive schemes of the Company
(including those under the Wilmar ESOS 2000); and (ii) the number of treasury shares delivered in respect of options granted under
all other share-based incentive schemes of the Company (if any), shall not exceed 15% of the total issued shares (excluding treasury
shares) of the Company on the date immediately preceding the relevant date of grant. There are no cash settlement alternatives.
The aggregate number of shares that may be granted to controlling shareholders (and their associates) of the Company shall not
exceed 25% of the total number of shares available under the Wilmar ESOS 2009, provided that the number of shares available
to each controlling shareholder or each of his associates shall not exceed 10% of the total number of shares available under the
aforesaid scheme.
There is no restriction on the eligibility of any participant to participate in any other share-based incentive schemes implemented by
the Company or any of its subsidiaries or by any associated company or otherwise.
On 21 May 2009, the Company granted options to subscribe for a total of 4,750,000 Wilmar shares at S$4.50 per share (being Market
Price as defined above) to all directors of the Company (including two directors who were controlling shareholders). The options are
valid for a term of five years from the date of grant and are exercisable in the following manner:

• After 2nd anniversary of the date of grant – the remaining 50% of options granted
On 10 March 2010, the Company granted options to subscribe for a total of 25,705,000 Wilmar shares at S$6.68 per share (being the
Market Price as defined above) to directors and senior executives. A total of 2,950,000 option shares were granted to ten directors of
the Company. No options were granted to directors who were controlling shareholders of the Company. The options are valid for a
term of five years from the date of grant and are exercisable in the following manner:

31 December 2011

Wilmar ESOS 2009 (continued)
For Executive Directors and Senior Executives

• After 2nd anniversary of the date of grant – 33% of options granted
• After 3rd anniversary of the date of grant – 34% of options granted
For Non-Executive Directors

All options are exercisable after the 1st anniversary of the date of grant.
As at 31 December 2011, the total number of shares exercisable under the options granted pursuant to the Wilmar ESOS 2009 was
27,605,000 shares.
Opening Options Options Options Closing Exercise Exercise

Date of grant balance granted cancelled exercised balance price period
2011
Wilmar ESOS 2000
27.11.2008 1,278,000 – – (227,500) 1,050,500 $2.45 28.11.2009 to
26.11.2013
27.11.2008 5,771,000 – – (2,765,500) 3,005,500 $2.45 28.11.2010 to
26.11.2013
09.12.2008 25,000 – – – 25,000 $2.63 10.12.2009 to
08.12.2013
09.12.2008 60,000 – – (10,000) 50,000 $2.63 10.12.2010 to
08.12.2013
7,134,000 – – (3,003,000) 4,131,000
Wilmar ESOS 2009

21.05.2009 1,825,000 – – (1,500,000) 325,000 $4.50 22.05.2010 to
21.05.2014
21.05.2009 2,375,000 – – – 2,375,000 $4.50 22.05.2011 to
21.05.2014
4,200,000 – – (1,500,000) 2,700,000
10.03.2010 9,401,350 – (211,200) – 9,190,150 $6.68 11.03.2011 to

10.03.2015
10.03.2010 7,951,350 – (211,200) – 7,740,150 $6.68 11.03.2012 to
10.03.2015
10.03.2010 8,192,300 – (217,600) – 7,974,700 $6.68 11.03.2013 to
10.03.2015
25,545,000 – (640,000) – 24,905,000
Total 36,879,000 – (640,000) (4,503,000) 31,736,000

31 December 2011

Opening Options Options Options Closing Exercise Exercise

Date of grant balance granted cancelled exercised balance price period
2010
Wilmar ESOS 2000
27.11.2008 4,294,500 – – (3,016,500) 1,278,000 S$2.45 28.11.2009 to
26.11.2013
27.11.2008 8,647,500 – (65,000) (2,811,500) 5,771,000 S$2.45 28.11.2010 to
26.11.2013
09.12.2008 50,000 – – (25,000) 25,000 S$2.63 10.12.2009 to
08.12.2013
09.12.2008 110,000 – (25,000) (25,000) 60,000 S$2.63 10.12.2010 to
08.12.2013
13,102,000 – (90,000) (5,878,000) 7,134,000
Wilmar ESOS 2009

21.05.2009 2,375,000 – – (550,000) 1,825,000 S$4.50 22.05.2010 to
21.05.2014
21.05.2009 2,375,000 – – – 2,375,000 S$4.50 22.05.2011 to
21.05.2014
4,750,000 – – (550,000) 4,200,000
10.03.2010 – 9,454,150 (52,800) – 9,401,350 S$6.68 11.03.2011 to

10.03.2015
10.03.2010 – 8,004,150 (52,800) – 7,951,350 S$6.68 11.03.2012 to
10.03.2015
10.03.2010 – 8,246,700 (54,400) – 8,192,300 S$6.68 11.03.2013 to
10.03.2015
– 25,705,000 (160,000) – 25,545,000
Total 17,852,000 25,705,000 (250,000) (6,428,000) 36,879,000
No options had been granted during the financial year ended 31 December 2011. The weighted average fair value of options granted
during the financial year ended 31 Dec 2010 was S$2.80.
The weighted average share price at the date of exercise of the options during the financial year was S$5.30 (2010: S$6.20).
The range of exercise prices for options outstanding at the end of the year was from S$2.45 to S$6.68 (2010: S$2.45 to S$6.68).
The weighted average remaining contractual life for these options is 3.0 years (2010: 3.9 years).

31 December 2011

The fair values of the options granted under the Wilmar ESOS 2000 and Wilmar ESOS 2009, are estimated at the respective grant dates
using trinomial option pricing in the Bloomberg Executive Option Valuation Module and binomial options pricing model respectively,
taking into account the terms and conditions upon which the options were granted. The inputs to the models used are as follows:
Grant year 2010 2009 2008
Dividend (S$ per share) 0.05 0.05 0.05

Expected volatility 55% 65% 65%
Risk-free interest rate (% p.a.) 0.77 to 1.30 0.89 to 1.03 1.07 to 1.30
Expected life of option (years) 2.0 2.0 2.0
Weighted average share price at date of grant (S$) 6.86 4.69 2.79
The expected volatility reflects the assumptions that the historical volatility is indicative of future trends, which may not necessarily be
the actual outcome.
32. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES

(a) Capital commitments
Capital expenditure contracted for as at the balance sheet date but not recognised in the financial statements is as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Capital commitments in respect of property, plant and equipment 779,208 622,820
(b) Operating lease commitments – as lessee

The Group has entered into commercial leases on certain premises and equipment. Future minimum rental payable under
non-cancellable operating leases at the balance sheet date are as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Not later than one year 13,829 26,806

Later than one year but not later than five years 24,626 19,399
Later than five years 32,459 24,786
70,914 70,991

31 December 2011
32. COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (CONTINUED)

(c) Commitments for sales and purchases contracts
The Group has the following committed sales and purchases contracts that are entered into for the use of the Group. The
contractual or underlying principal amounts of the committed contracts with fixed pricing terms that were outstanding as at
31 December are as follows:
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Committed contracts
Purchase 2,784,417 2,307,821
Sales 5,125,508 3,736,086
(d) Commitments for the development of oil palm plantations

The Group has commitments in relation to the development of oil palm plantations amounting to approximately US$65,076,000
as of 31 December 2011 (2010: US$103,939,000).
(e) Corporate guarantees

The following are the corporate guarantees for the credit facilities extended by banks to:
Group Company
2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Subsidiaries – – 5,016,547 3,360,238

Associates 310,816 268,575 299,072 264,951
310,816 268,575 5,315,619 3,625,189

31 December 2011
33. RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES

A. Sale and purchase of goods and services
In addition to the related party information disclosed elsewhere in the financial statements, the following significant transactions
between the Group and related parties took place on terms agreed between the parties during the financial year:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Related Parties
Dividend income 680 503

Freight charges 16,657 18,212
Others 34,722 95,536
Purchase of goods 3,676,331 3,968,633
Sales of goods 594,389 408,714
Associates
Dividend income 50,059 22,525

Freight charges 203,680 201,975
Interest expense 495 28
Interest income 10,978 6,589
Others 16,010 14,050
Purchase of goods 2,368,694 1,897,103
Sales of goods 1,597,097 1,338,299
Shipping charter income 45,427 23,932
B. Compensation of key management personnel
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Defined contribution plans 176 175

Salaries and bonuses 18,350 17,867
Short term employee benefits (including grant of share options) 4,160 8,751
22,686 26,793
Comprise amounts paid to:

Directors of the Company 12,788 15,268
Other key management personnel 9,898 11,525
22,686 26,793

31 December 2011
34. FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

A. Fair value of financial instruments that are carried at fair value
The following table shows an analysis of financial instruments carried at fair value by level of fair value hierarchy:
Group
2011
US$'000
Quoted prices
in active Significant
markets for other Significant
identical observable unobservable
instruments inputs inputs
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) Total
Financial assets:
Available-for-sale financial assets 29,352 56,051 49,284 134,687

Financial assets held for trading 333,715 – – 333,715
Derivatives
– Forward currency contracts – 101,999 – 101,999
– Futures, options, swap contracts, forward
freight agreements and firm commitment contracts 87,157 73,528 – 160,685
– Embedded derivatives of convertible bonds – – 330 330
At 31 December 2011 450,224 231,578 49,614 731,416
Financial liabilities:
Derivatives
– Futures, options, swap contracts, forward
freight agreements and firm commitment contracts 140,876 35,225 – 176,101
At 31 December 2011 140,876 165,583 – 306,459

31 December 2011
34. FAIR VALUE OF FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS (CONTINUED)

A. Fair value of financial instruments that are carried at fair value (continued)
Group
2010
US$'000
Quoted prices
in active Significant
markets for other Significant
identical observable unobservable
instruments inputs inputs
(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) Total
Financial assets:
Available-for-sale financial assets 25,350 17,014 45,300 87,664

Financial assets held for trading 316,301 – – 316,301
Derivatives
– Futures, options, swap contracts and
forward freight agreements 167,505 81,968 – 249,473
– Embedded derivatives of convertible bonds – – 85,014 85,014
At 31 December 2010 509,156 245,697 130,314 885,167
Derivatives
– Futures, options, swap contracts and
forward freight agreements 519,848 37,829 – 557,677
At 31 December 2010 519,848 184,920 – 704,768
Fair value hierarchy
The Group classifies fair value measurement using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making
the measurements. The fair value hierarchy have the following levels:
– Level 1 – Quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities
– Level 2 – Inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly
(i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices), and
– Level 3 – Inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs)

31 December 2011

Methods and assumptions used to determine fair values
The methods and assumptions used by management to determine fair values of financial instruments other than those whose
carrying amounts reasonably approximate their fair values as mentioned in Note 34B, are as follows:
Financial assets and liabilities Methods and assumptions
• Quoted equity and non-equity instruments Other than the quoted equity instruments disclosed below, fair value is
determined directly by reference to their published market bid price at the
balance sheet date.
• Forward currency contracts Fair value of forward currency contracts is calculated by reference to
current forward exchange rates for contracts with similar maturity profiles.
• F utures, options and swap contracts, firm Where available, quoted market prices are used as a measure of fair values
commitment contracts and forward freight for the outstanding contracts. Where the quoted market prices are not
agreements available, the fair values are based on management’s best estimate and
are arrived at by reference to the market prices of another contract that is
substantially similar.
Movements in Level 3 financial instruments measured at fair value
The following table presents the reconciliation for all financial instruments measured at fair value based on significant
unobservable inputs (Level 3).
Group
US$'000
Embedded
derivatives of Available-for-
convertible sale financial
bonds assets Total
At 1 January 2010 112,194 – 112,194

Acquisition of subsidiaries – 45,300 45,300
Total losses recognised in the income statement
(presented in non-operating items) (27,180) – (27,180)
At 31 December 2010 and 1 January 2011 85,014 45,300 130,314
Arising from business combination – 4,059 4,059
Total losses recognised in the income statement
(presented in non-operating items) (84,684) – (84,684)
Currency translation differences – (75) (75)
At 31 December 2011 330 49,284 49,614
There has been no transfer from Level 1 and Level 2 to Level 3 for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31
December 2010.

31 December 2011

Impact of changes to key assumptions on fair value of Level 3 financial instruments
The following table shows the impact on fair value of Level 3 financial instruments by using reasonably possible alternative
assumptions:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Effect of Effect of
reasonably reasonably
possible possible
Carrying alternative Carrying alternative
amount assumptions amount assumptions
Available-for-sale financial assets

Quoted equity instruments 49,284 – 45,300 –
Financial assets held for trading

Embedded derivatives of convertible bonds (+5%) 330 323 85,014 11,437
Embedded derivatives of convertible bonds (-5%) 330 (190) 85,014 (11,491)
The fair value of the quoted equity instruments is estimated using a discounted cash flow model, which includes some
assumptions that are not supported by observable market data. The key inputs used in determining the fair value include
future rental income, capital expenditure and operating expenses. Management believes that capital expenditure is the only
assumption to which there is a reasonably possible alternative. However, any significant capital expenditure above the estimated
level would be factored into any future rental negotiations. Therefore, no sensitivity of changes in this input is undertaken.
The fair value of the embedded derivatives of convertible bonds has been determined using a one-factor model, where stock
prices are assumed to be stochastic (lognormal) while interest rates are assumed to be deterministic. The methodology utilises a
trinomial tree to model changes in the stock price, which is determined by parameters such as the number of time steps and the
(constant) volatility of the stock price. The Group adjusted the stock price by 5% from its value as at balance sheet date, which is
based on the stock price movements of the Company.
B. Fair value of financial instruments by classes that are not carried at fair value and whose carrying amounts are
reasonable approximation of fair value
Current trade and other financial receivables and payables, current and non-current loans and borrowings at floating rate, other bank
deposits and cash and bank balances.
The carrying amounts of these financial assets and liabilities are a reasonable approximation of fair value, either due to their
short-term nature or that they are floating rate instruments that are re-priced to market interest rates on or near the balance
sheet date.

31 December 2011

C. Fair value of financial instruments by classes that are not carried at fair value and whose carrying amounts are not
reasonable approximation of fair value
The fair value of financial assets and liabilities by classes that are not carried at fair value and whose carrying amounts are not a
reasonable approximation of fair value are as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Carrying Fair Carrying Fair
amount value amount value
Financial assets:
Other financial receivables 80,101 # 106,810 #

Equity instruments, at cost 59,156 * 59,171 *
Other financial payables 4,691 # 4,274 #

Loans and borrowings
– Obligations under finance leases 22 # 40 #
Company
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Carrying Fair Carrying Fair
amount value amount value
Financial assets:
Other financial receivables 129,473 # 104,854 #

Equity instruments, at cost 36,000 * 36,000 *
# Fair value information has not been disclosed for these financial instruments because fair value cannot be measured reliably.
* Fair value information has not been disclosed for the Group's investments in equity instruments that are carried at cost because fair value cannot be measured reliably.
These equity instruments represent ordinary shares in the companies that are not quoted on any market and do not have any comparable industry peer that is listed.
In addition, the variability in the range of reasonable fair value estimates derived from valuation techniques is significant. The Group does not intend to dispose of these
investments in the foreseeable future.

31 December 2011
35. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES

The Group’s financial risk management policy seeks to ensure that adequate financial resources are available for the development
of the Group’s business whilst managing its credit, liquidity, interest rate, foreign currency, commodity price and market price risk.
The Group’s overall risk management strategy seeks to minimise adverse effects from the unpredictability of financial markets on the
Group’s financial performance. The Group uses relevant financial instruments to hedge the risks of such commercial exposure. Such
financial instruments are not held for trade or speculative purposes. These market risk management activities are governed by its risk
management system. There has been no change to the Group’s exposure to these financial risks or the manner in which it manages
and measures the risks for the financial years ended 31 December 2011 and 31 December 2010.
To ensure a sound system of internal controls, the Board has established a risk management framework for the Group. Wilmar’s risk
governance structure comprises three levels:
• The Risk Management Committee at the Board level;

• The Executive Risk Committee; and
• Risk management by the respective operating units.
The Board-level Risk Management Committee is responsible for

• overseeing the Executive Risk Committee;
• reviewing the overall risk management guidelines/framework;
• reviewing and recommending risk limits; and
• assessing the adequacy and effectiveness of the risk management policies and systems.
The Executive Risk Committee comprises Executive Directors and its responsibilities include, amongst others, the monitoring and
improvement of the overall effectiveness of the risk management system and the review of positions and limits to manage overall risk
exposure.
(a) Credit risk

Credit risk refers to the risk that a counterparty will default on its contractual obligations resulting in financial loss to the Group.
The Group’s objective is to seek continual revenue growth while minimising losses incurred due to increased credit risk exposure.
For trade receivables, the Group adopts the policy of dealing with customers of appropriate credit history, and obtaining
sufficient security where appropriate to mitigate credit risk. For other financial assets, the Group adopts the policy of dealing
only with high credit rating counterparties.
It is the Group’s policy that all customers who wish to trade on credit terms are subject to credit verification procedures. In
addition, receivable balances are monitored on an on-going basis with the result that the Group’s exposure to bad debts is not
significant.
Exposure to credit risk
At the balance sheet date, the Group’s maximum exposure to credit risk is represented by the carrying amount of each class of
financial assets recognised in the balance sheets, including derivatives with positive fair values.

31 December 2011
35. FINANCIAL RISK MANAGEMENT OBJECTIVES AND POLICIES (CONTINUED)

(a) Credit risk (continued)
Credit risk concentration profile
The Group determines concentrations of credit risk by monitoring the country and segment profile of its trade receivables on an
on-going basis. The credit risk concentration profile of the Group’s trade receivables (net of allowance for doubtful receivables)
at the balance sheet date is as follows:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 % US$'000 %
Restated*
By country:
South East Asia 949,329 27 870,485 28

People's Republic of China 1,254,515 36 891,309 28
India 84,176 2 122,543 4
Europe 307,969 9 209,507 7
Australia/New Zealand 422,425 12 320,632 10
Others 484,511 14 704,082 23
3,502,925 100 3,118,558 100
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 % US$'000 %
Restated*
By segment:
Merchandising and Processing

– Palm and Laurics 1,498,925 43 1,463,378 47
– Oilseeds and Grains 786,723 23 1,202,915 39
Consumer Products 379,667 11 249,071 8
Plantation and Palm Oil Mills 17,147 –# 15,111 –#
Sugar
– Milling 279,391 8 – –
– Merchandising and Processing 188,528 5 – –
Others 352,544 10 188,083 6
3,502,925 100 3,118,558 100
#
less than 1%
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year's figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition of
Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries (Note 15).

31 December 2011

(a) Credit risk (continued)
Financial assets that are neither past due nor impaired
Trade and other receivables that are neither past due nor impaired are creditworthy debtors with good payment record with
the Group. Cash and cash equivalents, financial assets held for trading and derivatives that are neither past due nor impaired are
placed with or entered into with reputable financial institutions or companies with high credit ratings and no history of default.
Financial assets that are either past due or impaired
Information regarding financial assets that are either past due or impaired is disclosed in Note 23.
(b) Liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group will encounter difficulty in meeting obligations due to shortage of funds. The Group
maintains sufficient liquidity by closely monitoring its cash flow. Due to the dynamic nature of its underlying business, the Group
adopts prudent liquidity risk management policies in maintaining sufficient credit facilities, including the use of trade finance for
the Group’s raw material purchases. The Group also aims at maintaining flexibility in funding by keeping credit facilities available
with different banks.
Analysis of financial instruments by remaining contractual maturities
The table below summarises the maturity profile of the Group’s and the Company’s financial assets and liabilities at the balance
sheet date based on contractual undiscounted amounts.
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Less than 1 to 5 Over 5 Less than 1 to 5 Over 5
1 year years years Total 1 year years years Total
Group
Financial assets:
Available-for-sale
financial assets – 193,843 – 193,843 3,010 – 143,825 146,835
Financial assets held
for trading 333,715 – – 333,715 316,301 – – 316,301
Trade and other
financial receivables 6,659,048 80,101 – 6,739,149 4,433,997 106,810 – 4,540,807
Derivative financial
instruments 239,354 23,660 – 263,014 350,091 131,111 – 481,202
Total cash and bank
balances 7,898,353 – – 7,898,353 6,787,812 – – 6,787,812
Total undiscounted
financial assets 15,130,470 297,604 – 15,428,074 11,891,211 237,921 143,825 12,272,957
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year’s figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition of

31 December 2011

(b) Liquidity risk (continued)
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Group
Trade and other

financial payables 2,841,341 4,691 – 2,846,032 2,253,202 4,274 – 2,257,476
instruments 263,402 43,057 – 306,459 629,534 75,234 – 704,768
Loans and borrowings 18,620,836 2,813,445 38 21,434,319 14,975,059 2,662,024 18,002 17,655,085
Total undiscounted
financial liabilities 21,725,579 2,861,193 38 24,586,810 17,857,795 2,741,532 18,002 20,617,329
Total net undiscounted
financial (liabilities)/
assets (6,595,109) (2,563,589) (38) (9,158,736) (5,966,584) (2,503,611) 125,823 (8,344,372)
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Company
Financial assets:
Available-for-sale
financial assets – 36,000 – 36,000 – – 36,000 36,000
Trade and other
financial receivables 1,791,780 129,473 – 1,921,253 2,893,968 104,854 – 2,998,822
instruments 330 – – 330 – 85,014 – 85,014
Total cash and bank
balances 3,243 – – 3,243 3,450 – – 3,450
Total undiscounted
financial assets 1,795,353 165,473 – 1,960,826 2,897,418 189,868 36,000 3,123,286
Trade and other

financial payables 24,448 – – 24,448 588,807 – – 588,807
Loans and borrowings 675,468 – – 675,468 516,102 675,468 – 1,191,570
Total undiscounted
financial liabilities 699,916 – – 699,916 1,104,909 675,468 – 1,780,377
Total net undiscounted
financial assets/
(liabilities) 1,095,437 165,473 – 1,260,910 1,792,509 (485,600) 36,000 1,342,909

31 December 2011

(b) Liquidity risk (continued)
The table below shows the contractual expiry by maturity of the Group and Company’s contingent liabilities and commitments.
The maximum amount of the financial guarantee contracts are allocated to the earliest period in which the guarantee could be
called.
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Group
Financial guarantees 122,935 187,881 – 310,816 154,833 110,118 3,624 268,575
Company
Financial guarantees 2,144,286 3,171,333 – 5,315,619 1,447,021 2,136,818 41,350 3,625,189
(c) Interest rate risk

Interest rate risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of a financial instrument will fluctuate because of changes in
market interest rates. The Group’s exposure to interest rate risk arises primarily from their loans and borrowings, interest-bearing
loans given to associates and non-controlling shareholders of subsidiaries and fixed deposits with financial institutions.
At the balance sheet date, if the interest rates had been 50 (2010: 50) basis points lower/higher with all other variables including
tax rate held constant, the Group’s profit before tax will be higher/lower by approximately US$68,132,000 (2010: US$53,619,000),
as a result of lower/higher interest expense on these net borrowings. As most of the Group’s borrowings are short-term and trade
related, any interest rate costs are typically priced into the respective trade transactions. Accordingly, the Group has minimum
interest rate exposure risk.
(d) Foreign currency risk

The Group operates in several countries with dominant operations in Singapore, People’s Republic of China, Indonesia, Malaysia,
Australia, Europe, Vietnam and others. Entities in the Group regularly transact in currencies other than their respective functional
currencies (“foreign currencies”) such as the United States Dollar (USD), Chinese Renminbi (RMB), Malaysian Ringgit (MYR) and
Australian Dollar (AUD).
Currency risk arises when transactions are denominated in foreign currencies. The Group seeks to manage its foreign currency
exposure by constructing natural hedges when it matches sales and purchases in any single currency or through financial
instruments, such as foreign currency forward exchange contracts. To manage the currency risk, individual Group entities in
consultation with Group Treasury enter into currency forwards, either in their respective countries or with Group Treasury itself.
Group Treasury in turn manages the overall currency exposure mainly through currency forwards.
The Group is also exposed to currency translation risk arising from its net investments in foreign operations, including Malaysia,
Indonesia, People’s Republic of China, Australia, Europe and Vietnam. The Group’s net investments in these countries are not
hedged as currency positions in these foreign currencies are considered to be long-term in nature.

31 December 2011

(d) Foreign currency risk (continued)
Sensitivity analysis for foreign currency risk
A 5% strengthening of the United States dollar against the following currencies at the balance sheet date would have increased/
(decreased) profit before tax and equity by the amounts shown below. The analysis assumes that all other variables, in particular
interest rates, remain constant.
Profit before tax Equity

2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Chinese Renminbi (392,249) (366,669) 178,996 203,593

Malaysian Ringgit 25,098 (52,886) (42,307) –
Indonesian Rupiah (3,654) (33,795) (23,705) –
Australian Dollar (59,776) (55,550) (15,696) –
Others (36,534) (19,397) – –
(e) Commodity price risk

The price of agricultural commodities are subject to wide fluctuations due to unpredictable factors such as weather, government
policies, changes in global demand resulting from population growth and changes in standards of living, and global production
of similar and competitive crops. During its ordinary course of business, the value of the Group’s open sales and purchases
commitments and inventory of raw material changes continuously in line with movements in the prices of the underlying
commodities. To the extent that its open sales and purchases commitments do not match at the end of each business day, the
Group is subject to price fluctuations in the commodities market.
While the Group is exposed to fluctuations in agricultural commodities prices, its policy is to minimise their risks arising from
such fluctuations by hedging its sales either through direct purchases of a similar commodity or through futures contracts on
the commodity exchanges. The prices on the commodity exchanges are generally quoted up to twelve months forward.
In the course of hedging its sales either through direct purchases or through futures, options and swap contracts, the Group may
also be exposed to the inherent risk associated with trading activities conducted by its personnel. The Group has in place a risk
management system to manage such risk exposure.

31 December 2011

(e) Commodity price risk (continued)
At the balance sheet date, a 5% (2010: 5%) increase/decrease of the commodities price index, with all other variables held
constant, would have (decreased)/increased profit before tax and equity by the amounts as shown below:
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Effect of increase in commodities price index

Effect on profit before tax (88,576) (184,425)
Effect on equity 2,754 (13,663)
Effect of decrease in commodities price index

Effect on profit before tax 88,576 184,425
Effect on equity (2,754) 13,663
(f) Market price risk

Market price risk is the risk that the fair value or future cash flows of the Group’s financial instruments will fluctuate because of
changes in market prices (other than commodity price, interest or exchange rates). The Group is exposed to equity price risk
arising from its investment in quoted equity instruments. These instruments are classified as financial assets held for trading or
available-for-sale financial assets.
Sensitivity analysis for equity price risk
At the balance sheet date, if the market price had been 5% (2010: 5%) higher/lower with all other variables held constant, the
Group’s profit before tax would have been approximately US$12,532,000 (2010: US$10,653,000) higher/lower, arising as a result
of higher/lower fair value gains on held for trading investments in equity instruments, and the Group’s other reserves in equity
would have been approximately US$1,469,000 (2010: US$1,267,000) higher/lower, arising as a result of an increase/decrease in
the fair value of equity instruments classified as available-for-sale financial assets.
36. CAPITAL MANAGEMENT

The primary objective of the Group’s capital management is to ensure that it maintains a strong credit rating and healthy capital ratios
in order to support its business and maximise shareholder value.
The Group manages its capital structure and makes adjustments to it, in light of changes in economic conditions. To maintain or
adjust the capital structure, the Group may adjust the dividend payment to shareholders, return capital to shareholders or issue
new shares. No changes were made in the objectives, policies or processes during the financial years ended 31 December 2011
and 31 December 2010.
The Group monitors capital using net gearing ratio and adjusted net gearing ratio.

31 December 2011
36. CAPITAL MANAGEMENT (CONTINUED)

(a) Net gearing ratio
Net gearing ratio is net debt to equity, which equals net debt divided by total capital. The Group includes within net debt, loans and
borrowings less total cash and bank balances. Capital includes equity attributable to owners of the parent, i.e. shareholders’ funds.
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Shareholders' funds 13,370,190 11,855,834
Loans and borrowings 20,888,943 17,425,187

Less: Cash and bank balances (7,898,353) (6,787,812)
Net debt 12,990,590 10,637,375
Net gearing ratio (times) 0.97 0.90
(b) Adjusted net gearing ratio

Adjusted net gearing ratio is adjusted net debt to equity, which equals adjusted net debt divided by total capital. The Group
includes within adjusted net debt, net debt less liquid working capital. Liquid working capital includes inventories (excluding
consumables) and trade receivables, less current liabilities (excluding loans and borrowings). Capital includes equity attributable
to owners of the parent, i.e. shareholders’ funds.
Group
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Shareholders' funds 13,370,190 11,855,834
Liquid working capital:

Inventories (excluding consumables) 6,904,965 6,334,259
Trade receivables 3,502,925 3,118,558
Less: Current liabilities (excluding loans and borrowings) (3,720,663) (3,386,758)
Total liquid working capital 6,687,227 6,066,059
Adjusted net debt 6,303,363 4,571,316
Adjusted net gearing ratio (times) 0.47 0.39

31 December 2011
37. SEGMENT INFORMATION

Reporting format
For management purposes, the Group is organised into business units based on their products and services, and has seven reportable
operating segments as follows:
Merchandising and Processing

Palm and laurics
This segment comprises the merchandising and processing of palm oil and laurics related products. Processing includes refining,
fractionation and other down-stream processing.
Oilseeds and grains

This segment comprises the merchandising and processing of a wide range of edible oils, oilseeds and grains from the crushing,
further processing and refining of soybean as well as other oilseeds and grains.
Consumer Products
This segment comprises packaging and sales of consumer pack edible oils, rice, flour and grains.
Plantation and Palm Oil Mills

This segment comprises oil palm cultivation and milling.
Sugar
Milling
This segment comprises milling of sugarcane to produce raw sugar and also by-products, such as molasses.
Merchandising & Processing

This segment comprises the merchandising and processing of sugar and its related products. The processing of sugar produces food-
grade products such as white sugar, brown sugar, caster sugar and syrups.
Others
This segment includes the manufacturing and distribution of fertiliser products and ship-chartering services.
Except as indicated above, no operating segments have been aggregated to form the above reportable operating segments.
Management monitors the operating results of its business units separately for the purpose of making decisions about resource
allocation and performance assessment. Segment performance is evaluated based on operating profit or loss which in certain respects,
as explained in the table below, is measured differently from operating profit or loss in the consolidated financial statements. Group
income taxes are managed on a group basis and are not allocated to operating segments.
Allocation basis and transfer pricing

Segment results, assets and liabilities include items directly attributable to a segment as well as those that can be allocated on a
reasonable basis. Unallocated items comprise mainly corporate assets, income tax and deferred tax assets and liabilities, loans and
borrowings and related expenses.
Transfer prices between business segments are set on an arm’s length basis in a manner similar to transactions with third parties.
Segment revenue, expenses and results include transfers between business segments. These transfers are eliminated on consolidation.

31 December 2011
37. SEGMENT INFORMATION (CONTINUED)

2011
Merchandising Per
and Processings Plantation Sugar consolidated
Palm and Oilseeds Consumer and Palm Merchandising financial
Laurics and Grains Products Oil Mills Milling and Processing Others Eliminations statements
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Revenue:
Sales to external
customers 22,425,880 10,729,682 6,768,811 82,049 1,015,828 2,044,189 1,643,595 – 44,710,034
Inter-segment 491,450 1,940,605 – 1,760,459 147,714 406 1,233,061 (5,573,695) –
Total revenue 22,917,330 12,670,287 6,768,811 1,842,508 1,163,542 2,044,595 2,876,656 (5,573,695) 44,710,034
Results:
Segment results 585,923 422,886 85,296 733,837 85,710 55,542 41,642 – 2,010,836
Share of results of
associates 19,448 128,685 (494) 23,843 3,109 3,109 7,555 – 185,255
Unallocated expenses (117,350)
Profit before tax 2,078,741
Income tax expense (379,219)
Profit after tax 1,699,522
Assets and
Liabilities:
Segment assets 8,322,607 16,319,402 4,098,204 4,138,618 1,802,840 1,038,687 9,279,475 (7,248,753) 37,751,080
Investment in
associates 377,252 943,554 5,675 92,655 14,717 14,717 130,176 – 1,578,746
Unallocated assets 309,927
Total assets 39,639,753
Segment liabilities 5,902,621 13,746,965 2,073,240 321,245 1,827,509 674,122 6,750,514 (7,248,753) 24,047,463
Unallocated liabilities 1,343,925
Total liabilities 25,391,388
Other segment
information
Additions to non-
current assets 299,446 591,579 171,753 189,971 281,188 89,560 169,426 – 1,792,923
Depreciation,
impairment and
amortisation 122,801 98,869 30,720 38,489 78,077 39,976 69,641 – 478,573
Finance income 88,677 216,287 47,933 7,562 1,099 1,871 66,870 (183,686) 246,613
Finance cost (175,705) (329,681) (64,098) (14,319) (23,487) (24,512) (100,741) 183,686 (548,857)#
# Including non-operating finance costs amounting to approximately US$43,061,000 on bank borrowings for acquisition of Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries

31 December 2011

2010
Merchandising Per
and Processings Plantation consolidated
Palm and Oilseeds Consumer and Palm financial
Laurics and Grains Products Oil Mills Others Eliminations statements
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Revenue:
Sales to external customers 16,152,667 8,509,122 4,697,160 76,579 941,996 – 30,377,524
Inter-segment 668,671 1,662,913 – 1,408,656 1,076,149 (4,816,389) –
Total revenue 16,821,338 10,172,035 4,697,160 1,485,235 2,018,145 (4,816,389) 30,377,524
Results:
Segment results 587,061 117,502 149,796 635,817 188,535 – 1,678,711
Share of results of associates 24,800 (3,099) 595 9,128 6,703 – 38,127
Unallocated expenses (72,652)
Profit before tax 1,644,186
Income tax expense (189,660)
Profit after tax 1,454,526
Assets and Liabilities:

Segment assets 6,933,308 15,236,823 3,019,604 3,839,487 13,802,328 (10,270,362) 32,561,188
Investment in associates 392,285 727,672 5,856 70,090 67,756 – 1,263,659
Unallocated assets 266,419
Total assets 34,091,266
Segment liabilities 4,728,185 12,996,170 887,724 628,956 11,330,604 (10,270,362) 20,301,277

Unallocated liabilities 1,183,697
Total liabilities 21,484,974
Other segment information

Additions to non-current assets 413,389 2,254,152 93,810 152,082 219,450 – 3,132,883
Depreciation, impairment and
amortisation 106,744 85,632 23,321 34,180 65,732 – 315,609
Finance income 46,401 107,467 26,130 2,380 19,794 (66,820) 135,352
Finance cost (82,992) (125,361) (22,450) (3,228) (41,254) 66,820 (208,465)#
# Including non-operating finance costs amounting to approximately US$339,000 on bank borrowings for acquisition of Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries


31 December 2011

Notes: Nature of adjustments and eliminations to arrive at amounts reported in the consolidated financial statements
A Inter-segment revenues are eliminated on consolidation.
B The following items are added to/(deducted from) segment results to arrive at “Profit before tax” presented in the
consolidated income statement:
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Accretion of interest on convertible bonds (12,702) (10,720)

Share-based payments (executive share options) (19,964) (34,742)
Fair value loss of embedded derivatives of convertible bonds (84,684) (27,180)
Others – (10)
(117,350) (72,652)
C Additions to non-current assets consist of additions to property, plant and equipment, intangible assets and biological
assets.
D The following items are added to segment assets to arrive at total assets reported in the consolidated balance sheet:
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Deferred tax assets 226,865 205,724

Tax recoverable 83,062 60,695
309,927 266,419
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year’s figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition
of Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries (Note 15).
E The following items are added to segment liabilities to arrive at total liabilities reported in the consolidated balance sheet:
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
Deferred tax liabilities 639,422 527,293

Tax payable 146,086 110,688
Convertible bonds 558,417 545,716
1,343,925 1,183,697
* In accordance with FRS 103, the Group has restated the prior year’s figures subsequent to the finalisation of purchase price allocation exercise for the acquisition
of Sucrogen Limited and its subsidiaries (Note 15).

31 December 2011

Geographical information
Revenue and non-current assets information based on the geographical location of customers and assets respectively are as follows:
Revenues Non-current assets

2011 2010 2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000 US$'000 US$'000
Restated*
South East Asia 10,176,198 7,443,775 6,778,501 6,117,496

People's Republic of China 21,658,371 15,869,686 5,875,064 5,011,783
India 1,388,853 1,179,287 53,400 73,189
Europe 3,514,386 2,190,314 303,607 312,103
Australia/New Zealand 2,007,098 41,607 2,128,917 1,888,437
Others 5,965,128 3,652,855 291,171 172,502
44,710,034 30,377,524 15,430,660 13,575,510
Non-current assets information presented above consists of property, plant and equipment, investment in associates, plasma
investments, biological assets, intangible assets and other receivables as presented in the consolidated balance sheet.
38. DIVIDENDS
Group and Company
2011 2010
US$'000 US$'000
Declared and paid during the financial year:
Dividends on ordinary shares:

– Final tax-exempt (one-tier) dividend for 2010: S$0.023 (2009: S$ 0.05) per share 120,152 233,570
– Interim tax-exempt (one-tier) dividend for 2011: S$0.03 (2010: S$0.032) per share 159,668 151,088
279,820 384,658
Proposed but not recognised as a liability as at 31 December:
Dividends on ordinary shares, subject to shareholders' approval at the AGM:

– Final exempt (one-tier) dividend for 2011: S$0.031 (2010: S$0.023) per share 152,614 112,527

31 December 2011
39. SUBSIDIARIES OF THE GROUP

The following is the list of the significant subsidiaries of the Group.
Place of Proportion of
Name of subsidiaries incorporation Principal activities ownership interest
2011 2010
% %
Cai Lan Oils & Fats Industries Vietnam Manufacture and sale of vegetable 68 68
Company Ltd(3) oils and related products
Equatorial Trading Limited(2) Malaysia Investment holding and trading in 78+ 78+
& its subsidiaries vegetable oils
PGEO Group Sdn Bhd(2) Malaysia Investment holding, manufacture and sale 100 100
& its subsidiaries of edible oils
PPB Oil Palms Berhad(2) Malaysia Investment holding, oil palm cultivation and 100 100
& its subsidiaries palm oil milling
PT AMP Plantation(2) Indonesia Oil palm cultivation and palm oil milling 100 100
PT Buluh Cawang Plantations(2) Indonesia Oil palm cultivation and palm oil milling 100 100
PT Kencana Sawit Indonesia(2) Indonesia Oil palm cultivation and palm oil milling 100 100
PT Multimas Nabati Asahan(2) Indonesia Edible oils refining 100 100
PT Mustika Sembuluh(2) Indonesia Oil palm cultivation and palm oil milling 90 90
PT Perkebunan Milano(2) Indonesia Palm oil milling 100 100
PT Sinar Alam Permai(2) Indonesia Edible oils refining 100 100
PT Wilmar Nabati Indonesia(2) Indonesia Edible oils refining 100 100
Sucrogen Limited(2) Australia Investment holding, processing and 100 100

& its subsidiaries merchandising of sugar products
Wii Pte. Ltd.(1) Singapore Finance and treasury centre 100 100
Wilmar China Limited(2) Hong Kong Investment holding, processing and 98+ 98+
& its subsidiaries merchandising of oilseeds, edible oils
and grains

31 December 2011
39. SUBSIDIARIES OF THE GROUP (CONTINUED)

Name of subsidiaries incorporation Principal activities ownership interest
2011 2010
% %
Wilmar Europe Holdings B.V.(2) The Netherlands Investment holding, manufacturing, trading 100 100
& its subsidiaries and sale of edible oil products
Wilmar Ship Holdings Pte. Ltd.(3) Singapore Investment holding, ship-owning, chartering 100 100
& its subsidiaries and ship management
Wilmar Trading Pte Ltd(1) Singapore International trading in edible oils 100 100
Audited by Ernst & Young LLP, Singapore

(1)
Audited by member firms of Ernst & Young Global in the respective countries
(2)
(3)
Audited by other auditors
+
The effective interest of the Group has been rounded to the nearest whole % as indicated

31 December 2011
40. associates OF THE GROUP

The following is the list of the significant associates of the Group.
Name of associates incorporation Principal activities ownership interest
2011 2010
% %
Adani Wilmar Limited(3) India Manufacturing and trading of edible oils 50 50
and vanaspati
Bidco Uganda Limited(3) Uganda Manufacture and sale of edible vegetable oils, 39 39
fats and soaps
C. Czarnikow Limited(3) United Kingdom Supplier of world sugar market services, 43+ 43+
including brokerage and advising services
COFCO East Ocean Oils & Grains People's Oilseeds crushing, edible oils refining, 43+ 43+
Industries (Zhangjiagang) Republic of fractionation and packaging; flour and
Co., Ltd(3) China rice milling
DelMar Pte. Ltd.(1) Singapore Investment holding 48 48
FFM Berhad(3) Malaysia Investment holding, grains trading, flour milling 20 –
and animal feed manufacturing
Grand Silver (Lanshan) Limited(3) Hong Kong Investment holding 44+ 44+
Josovina Commodities Pte Ltd(3) Singapore Investment holding and vegetable oils trading 50 50
Kencana Agri Limited(3) Singapore Investment holding 20 20
Lahad Datu Edible Oils Sdn Bhd(3) Malaysia Edible oils refining and palm kernel crushing 45 45
Laiyang Luhua Fengyi Plastics Industry People's Plastics processing 49+ 49+
Co., Ltd(3) Republic of
China
Laiyang Luhua Fragrant Peanut Oil People's Peanut crushing and edible oils packaging 25+ 25+
China
Nauvu Investments Pte. Ltd.(1) Singapore Investment holding 50 50
PT Bumipratama Khatulistiwa(2) Indonesia Oil palm cultivation and palm oil milling 44+ 44+

31 December 2011
40. associates OF THE GROUP (CONTINUED)

Name of associates incorporation Principal activities ownership interest
2011 2010
% %
Sasol Yihai (Lianyungang) Alcohol People's Alcohol based oleochemical products processing 39+ 39+
Industries Co., Ltd(3) Republic of
China
Sethal Holdings Limited(3) Cyprus Investment holding 48 48
Shandong Luhua Fragrant Peanut Oil People's Peanut crushing and edible oils packaging 25+ 25+
China
TSH-Wilmar Sdn. Bhd.(2) Malaysia Palm oil refining and kernel crushing 50 50
Wilmar Consultancy Services Singapore Investment holding and providing Information 50 50
Pte. Ltd.(3) Technology and consultancy services
Wilmar Gavilon Pty Ltd(2) Australia Commodity trading and importer and 50 50
distributor of edible oils
Xiang Yang Luhua Fragrant Peanut Oil People's Peanut crushing and edible oils packaging 32+ 32+
China
Zhoukou Luhua Fragrant Peanut Oil People’s Peanut crushing and edible oils packaging 48+ 48+
China
(1)
Audited by Ernst & Young LLP, Singapore
(2)
Audited by member firms of Ernst & Young Global in the respective countries
(3)
Audited by other auditors
+
The effective interest of the Group has been rounded to the nearest whole % as indicated

31 December 2011
41. SUBSEQUENT EVENTs

(a) US$5,000,000,000 Guaranteed Medium Term Note Programme
On 28 December 2011, the Company established a US$5,000,000,000 Guaranteed Medium Term Note Programme (the
“Programme”). Subsequently, the Company issued the following Notes under the Programme on 25 January 2012:
• S$250,000,000 3.5% Notes due 2017; and

• S$100,000,000 4.1% Notes due 2019.
(b) Legal suit with Pacific Inter-Link Sdn Bhd

In April 2011, Wilmar Trading Pte Ltd (“WTPL”), a wholly owned subsidiary, was served with a writ of summons issued by the High
Court of Malaya on the application by the plaintiff in the writ of summons, Pacific Inter-Link Sdn Bhd (“PIL”), a Malaysian palm
oil trader, for alleged defamation and unlawful interference with PIL’s economic interests and business with regard to WTPL’s
contracts of sale of palm oil products with other parties. PIL was not a party to those contracts of sale of palm oil products
between WTPL and other parties. The defendants named in the writ of summons are WTPL and three other Malaysian parties. PIL
is claiming against all four defendants, jointly and severally, for amongst others, general damages of US$244,200,000, aggravated
damages of US$200,000,000 as well as a public apology.
The Company, through its lawyers, subsequently sent PIL’s lawyers a letter demanding immediate discontinuance of PIL’s suit
against WTPL, as well as a public apology, failing which steps will be taken to strike out PIL’s suit against WTPL, and the Company
and WTPL will hold PIL fully responsible for all losses, damages and legal costs suffered.
On 10 February 2012, the High Court of Malaya allowed WTPL’s and the other 3 defendants’ striking out applications with costs on
the grounds that the writ of summons and statement of claim filed by PIL did not disclose a reasonable or sustainable cause of
action and that the cause of action filed by PIL was frivolous, vexatious and an abuse of the process of the court. PIL is appealing
to the Court of Appeal of Malaysia against the decision of the High Court whereby PIL’s writ of summons and statement of claim
were ordered to be struck out with costs.
As of the date of this report, no hearing date for PIL’s appeal has been fixed.
WTPL intends to defend the claim vigourously.
42. AUTHORISATION OF FINANCIAL STATEMENTS

The financial statements for the financial year ended 31 December 2011 were authorised for issue in accordance with a resolution of
the directors on 21 March 2012.

statistics of shareholdings
Share Capital as at 6 March 2012

Number of Shares (excluding treasury shares) : 6,401,521,092
Number of Shareholders : 19,669
Number of Treasury Shares Held : Nil
Class of Shares : Ordinary shares (“Shares”)
Voting Rights : One vote per share
Analysis of Shareholdings
Number of Number of
Range of Shareholdings Shareholders % Shares %
1 to 999 760 3.86 145,281 0.00
1,000 to 10,000 16,301 82.88 54,250,630 0.85
10,001 to 1,000,000 2,537 12.90 131,080,363 2.05
1,000,001 and above 71 0.36 6,216,044,818 97.10
Total 19,669 100.00 6,401,521,092 100.00
Substantial Shareholders
As at 6 March 2012
(As recorded in the Register of Substantial Shareholders)
Name of Substantial Shareholders Direct Interest Indirect Interest Total Interest %

Kuok Khoon Hong (1)
500,000 763,467,168 763,967,168 11.93
Martua Sitorus(2) 4,988,000 646,321,242 651,309,242 10.17
Longhlin Asia Limited(3) 246,009,921 90,000,000 336,009,921 5.25
Golden Parklane Limited(4) – 640,870,365 640,870,365 10.01
Archer Daniels Midland Company(5) – 1,046,986,850 1,046,986,850 16.36
Archer Daniels Midland Asia-Pacific Limited(6) 335,625,280 354,961,795 690,587,075 10.79
ADM Ag Holding Limited (formerly known as
Wilmar International Holdings Limited) 354,961,795 – 354,961,795 5.54
Global Cocoa Holdings Ltd 356,399,775 – 356,399,775 5.57
Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad(7) 230,000 1,174,011,955 1,174,241,955 18.34
PPB Group Berhad 1,172,614,755 – 1,172,614,755 18.32
Kerry Group Limited(8) – 640,167,755 640,167,755 10.00
Kerry Holdings Limited(9) – 321,587,065 321,587,065 5.02
Notes:
1. Mr Kuok Khoon Hong is deemed to be interested in 179,204,971 Shares held by Hong Lee Holdings (Pte) Ltd, 230,461,271 Shares held by HPR Investments Limited, 10,996,073 Shares held by HPRY
Holdings Limited, 336,009,921 Shares held by Longhlin Asia Limited, 6,650,932 Shares held by Pearson Investments Limited and 144,000 Shares held by Kuok Hock Swee & Sons Sdn Bhd.
2. Mr Martua Sitorus is deemed to be interested in 450,877 Shares held by his spouse, 51,267,514 Shares held by Bonoto Investments Limited, 294,801,372 Shares held by Bolney Enterprises Limited,
294,801,479 Shares held by Firefly Limited and 5,000,000 Shares held by Burlingham International Ltd.
3. Longhlin Asia Limited is deemed to be interested in 90,000,000 Shares held in the names of nominee companies.
4. Golden Parklane Limited is deemed to be interested in 51,267,514 Shares held by Bonoto Investments Limited, 294,801,372 Shares held by Bolney Enterprises Limited and 294,801,479 Shares held by
Firefly Limited.
5. Archer Daniels Midland Company is deemed to be interested in 335,625,280 Shares held by Archer Daniels Midland Asia-Pacific Limited and 354,961,795 Shares held by ADM Ag Holding Limited (“ADM
Ag”) and 356,399,775 Shares held by Global Cocoa Holdings Ltd.
6. Archer Daniels Midland Asia-Pacific Limited is deemed to be interested in 354,961,795 Shares held by ADM Ag.
7. Kuok Brothers Sdn Berhad is deemed to be interested in 1,172,614,755 Shares held by PPB Group Berhad, 1,274,200 Shares held by Gaintique Sdn Bhd, 100,000 Shares held by Min Tien & Co Sdn Bhd
and 23,000 Shares held by Hoe Sen (Mersing) Sdn Bhd.
8. Kerry Group Limited is deemed to be interested in 6,732,396 Shares held by Ace Time Holdings Limited, 45,276 Shares held by Alpha Model Limited, 20,651,715 Shares held by Bright Magic Investments
Limited, 504,375 Shares held by Crystal White Limited, 30,405,900 Shares held by Dalex Investments Limited, 256,211,778 Shares held by Harpole Resources Limited, 1,209,032 Shares held by Kerry Asset
Management Limited, 26,836,649 Shares held by Macromind Investments Limited, 21,210,279 Shares held by Marsser Limited, 33,760,355 Shares held by Natalon Company Limited and 242,600,000
Shares held by Noblespirit Corporation.
9. Kerry Holdings Limited is deemed to be interested in 30,405,900 Shares held by Dalex Investments Limited, 256,211,778 Shares held by Harpole Resources Limited, 1,209,032 Shares held by Kerry Asset
Management Limited and 33,760,355 Shares held by Natalon Company Limited.

statistics of shareholdings
Twenty Largest Shareholders

As at 6 March 2012
(As shown in the Register of Members and Depository Register)
No. Name of Shareholders No. of Shares %

1 PPB Group Berhad 1,172,614,755 18.32
2 Citibank Nominees Singapore Pte Ltd 568,037,417 8.87
3 HSBC (Singapore) Nominees Pte Ltd 397,798,372 6.21
4 Global Cocoa Holdings Ltd 356,399,775 5.57
5 ADM Ag Holding Limited (formerly known as Wilmar International Holdings Limited) 354,961,795 5.54
6 DBSN Services Pte Ltd 353,207,146 5.52
7 Raffles Nominees (Pte) Ltd 344,021,624 5.37
8 Archer Daniels Midland Asia-Pacific Limited 335,625,280 5.24
9 Kuok (Singapore) Limited 256,951,112 4.01
10 Harpole Resources Limited 256,211,778 4.00
11 Morgan Stanley Asia (Singapore) Securities Pte Ltd 255,848,938 4.00
12 Longhlin Asia Limited 246,009,921 3.84
13 DBS Nominees Pte Ltd 216,746,353 3.39
14 Noblespirit Corporation 207,400,000 3.24
15 DB Nominees (Singapore) Pte Ltd 207,151,001 3.24
16 United Overseas Bank Nominees Pte Ltd 141,859,809 2.22
17 Hong Lee Holdings (Pte) Ltd 94,204,971 1.47
18 Leagrove Investments Limited 43,519,425 0.68
19 Shereford Developments Limited 39,361,912 0.61
20 Natalon Company Limited 33,760,355 0.53
TOTAL 5,881,691,739 91.88
Shareholding Held By The Public

Based on the information available to the Company as at 6 March 2012, 28.12% of the issued ordinary shares of the Company is held by the
public and therefore, the Company has complied with Rule 723 of the SGX-ST Listing Manual.
Information relating to the issue of US$600,000,000 Convertible Bonds due 18 December 2012 (“Convertible Bonds”)
According to the Register of Convertible Bonds, Citivic Nominees Limited was the sole registered shareholder and the amount of Convertible
Bonds held was US$573,500,000 as at 6 March 2012. The Principal Paying Agent and Conversion Agent is Citibank, N.A. London Branch,
at Citigroup Centre, Canada Square, Canary Wharf, London E14 5LB, United Kingdom.

notice of annual general meeting
WILMAR INTERNATIONAL LIMITED

(Incorporated in the Republic of Singapore)
(Company Registration No. 199904785Z)
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the Annual General Meeting of the Company will be held at Jurong Room, Lobby Level, Shangri-La Hotel,
22 Orange Grove Road, Singapore 258350 on Friday, 27 April 2012 at 10.00 a.m. for the following businesses:
AS ORDINARY BUSINESS
To consider and if thought fit, to pass the following as Ordinary Resolutions, with or without modifications:
1. To receive and adopt the Audited Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2011 and the Reports of the
Directors and Auditors thereon. (Resolution 1)
2. To approve the payment of a proposed final tax exempt (one-tier) dividend of S$0.031 per ordinary share for the
year ended 31 December 2011. (Resolution 2)
3. To approve the payment of Directors’ fees of S$605,000 for the year ended 31 December 2011 (2010: S$360,000).
(See Explanatory Note 1) (Resolution 3)
4. (a) To re-elect the following Directors:
(i) Mr Kuok Khoon Hong (Retiring by rotation under Article 99) (Resolution 4)
(ii) Mr Leong Horn Kee (Retiring by rotation under Article 99) (Resolution 5)
(iii) Mr Tay Kah Chye (Retiring by rotation under Article 99) (Resolution 6)
Note: Mr Tay Kah Chye will, upon re-election as a Director of the Company, remain as the Chairman of the Audit Committee and
is considered independent for the purposes of Rule 704(8) of the Listing Manual of the Singapore Exchange Securities Trading
Limited (“SGX-ST”). Mr Tay Kah Chye will also continue to serve as a member of the Nominating Committee upon re-election.
(b) To re-appoint, pursuant to Section 153(6) of the Companies Act, Chapter 50 of Singapore (“Act”), Mr Yeo Teng
Yang, who will be retiring under Section 153 of the Act, to hold office from the date of this Annual General
Meeting until the next Annual General Meeting.
(Resolution 7)
Note: Mr Yeo Teng Yang will, upon re-election as a Director of the Company, remain as a member of the Audit Committee and is
considered independent for the purposes of Rule 704(8) of the Listing Manual of the SGX-ST. Mr Yeo Teng Yang will also continue
to serve as the Chairman of the Risk Management Committee and a member of the Remuneration Committee upon re-election.
5. To re-appoint Ernst & Young LLP as auditors of the Company and to authorise the Directors to fix their (Resolution 8)
remuneration.

AS SPECIAL BUSINESS
To consider and if thought fit, to pass the following as Ordinary Resolutions, with or without modifications:
6. Renewal of Mandate for Interested Person Transactions
That:
(a) approval be and is hereby given, for the renewal of the mandate for the purposes of Chapter 9 of the Listing
Manual of Singapore Exchange Securities Trading Limited, for the Company, its subsidiaries and associated
companies (within the meaning of the said Chapter 9) or any of them to enter into any of the transactions
falling within the categories of interested person transactions as set out in the Company’s Addendum
dated 3 April 2012 to Annual Report 2011 (the “Addendum”), with any party who is of the class or classes of
Interested Persons described in the Addendum, provided that such transactions are carried out on normal
commercial terms and will not be prejudicial to the interests of the Company and its minority shareholders
and are in accordance with the procedures as set out in the Addendum (the “IPT Mandate”);
(b) the IPT Mandate shall, unless revoked or varied by the Company in general meeting, continue in force
until the next Annual General Meeting of the Company is held or is required by law to be held, whichever is
earlier; and
(c) the Directors of the Company and/or any of them be and are hereby authorised to do all such acts and things
(including, without limitation, executing all such documents as may be required) as they and/or he may
consider expedient or necessary or in the interests of the Company to give effect to the IPT Mandate and/or
this Resolution.
7. Authority to issue and allot shares in the capital of the Company
That, pursuant to Section 161 of the Companies Act, Chapter 50 of Singapore, and the listing rules of the
Singapore Exchange Securities Trading Limited (the “SGX-ST”) (including any supplemental measures thereto
from time to time), approval be and is hereby given to the Directors of the Company to:
(a) (i) issue shares in the capital of the Company whether by way of rights, bonus or otherwise; and/or
(ii) make or grant offers, agreements or options (collectively, “Instruments”) that might or would require
shares to be issued or other transferable rights to subscribe for or purchase shares including but not limited
to the creation and issue of warrants, debentures or other instruments convertible into shares; and
(iii) issue additional Instruments arising from adjustments made to the number of Instruments previously
issued, while the authority conferred by shareholders was in force, in accordance with the terms of issue
of such Instruments, (notwithstanding that such authority conferred by shareholders may have ceased to
be in force);

at any time and upon such terms and conditions and for such purposes and to such persons as the Directors
may in their absolute discretion deem fit; and
(b) (notwithstanding the authority conferred by the shareholders may have ceased to be in force) issue shares
in pursuance of any Instrument made or granted by the Directors while the authority was in force or any
additional Instrument referred to in (a)(iii) above,
provided always that
(I) the aggregate number of shares to be issued pursuant to this Resolution (including shares to be issued in
pursuance of Instruments made or granted pursuant to this Resolution) does not exceed 50% of the total
number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares) in the capital of the Company at the time of the passing
of this Resolution (as calculated in accordance with subparagraph (II) below), of which the aggregate number
of shares issued other than on a pro rata basis to existing shareholders (including shares to be issued in
pursuance of Instruments made or granted pursuant to this Resolution) does not exceed 20% of the total
number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares) in the capital of the Company at the time of the passing
of this Resolution (as calculated in accordance with subparagraph (II) below);
(II) (subject to such manner of calculation as may be prescribed by SGX-ST for the purpose of determining the
aggregate number of shares that may be issued under subparagraph (I) above), the percentage of the issued
shares is based on the Company’s total number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares) at the time of the
passing of this Resolution after adjusting for:
(i) new shares arising from the conversion or exercise of convertible securities;
(ii) new shares arising from the exercise of share options or vesting of share awards outstanding or subsisting
at the time of the passing of this Resolution, provided the options or awards were granted in compliance
with Part VIII of Chapter 8 of the Listing Manual of SGX-ST; and
(iii) any subsequent bonus issue, consolidation or subdivision of the Company’s shares; and
(III) the authority conferred by this Resolution shall, unless revoked or varied by the Company at a general
meeting, continue in force until the conclusion of the next Annual General Meeting or the date by which the
next Annual General Meeting of the Company is required by law to be held, whichever is earlier.

8. Authority to grant options and issue and allot shares under Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009
That authority be and is hereby given to the Directors of the Company to offer and grant options from time to
time in accordance with the provisions of the Wilmar Executives Share Option Scheme 2009 of the Company
(“Wilmar ESOS 2009”) and, pursuant to Section 161 of the Companies Act, Chapter 50 of Singapore, to issue and
allot from time to time such number of shares in the capital of the Company as may be required to be issued
pursuant to the exercise of options granted (while the authority conferred by this Resolution is in force) under
the Wilmar ESOS 2009, notwithstanding that the authority conferred by this Resolution may have ceased to be
in force, PROVIDED ALWAYS THAT:
(a) the aggregate number of shares over which the committee may offer to grant options on any date, when
added to the number of new shares issued and/or issuable and/or existing shares transferred and/or
transferable in respect of the options granted under the Wilmar ESOS 2009 and in respect of all other share-
based incentive schemes of the Company (including but not limited to the Wilmar Executives Share Option
Scheme 2000), if any, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares)
from time to time; and
(b) the authority conferred by this Resolution shall, unless revoked or varied by the Company at a general
meeting, continue in force until the conclusion of the next Annual General Meeting or the date by which the
next Annual General Meeting of the Company is required by law to be held, whichever is earlier.
NOTICE OF BOOKS CLOSURE AND DIVIDEND PAYMENT DATES
NOTICE is also hereby given that the Share Transfer Register and Register of Members of the Company will be
closed from 8 May 2012, 5.00 p.m. to 9 May 2012, both dates inclusive, for the purpose of determining shareholders’
entitlement to the Company’s proposed final tax exempt (one-tier) dividend of S$0.031 per ordinary share for the
financial year ended 31 December 2011 (the “Proposed Final Dividend”).
Duly completed registrable transfers received by the Company’s registrar, Tricor Barbinder Share Registration Services,
of 80 Robinson Road #02-00, Singapore 068898 up to 5.00 p.m. on 8 May 2012 will be registered to determine
shareholders’ entitlement to the Proposed Final Dividend. The Proposed Final Dividend, if approved at the Annual
General Meeting to be held on 27 April 2012, will be paid on 18 May 2012.
Depositors whose securities accounts with The Central Depository (Pte) Limited are credited with the Company’s
shares as at 5.00 p.m. on 8 May 2012 will be entitled to the Proposed Final Dividend.
By Order of the Board

Teo La-Mei
Colin Tan Tiang Soon
Joint Company Secretaries
Singapore
3 April 2012

Explanatory Notes:
1. The Ordinary Resolution 3 proposed in item no. 3 above, is to approve the payment of Directors’ fees of S$605,000 (2010: S$360,000)
for the financial year ended 31 December 2011 for services rendered by Non-Executive Directors and Non-Executive Independent
Directors. The increase in Directors’ fee of S$245,000 is due to the proposed payment of the basic fee, in accordance with the
existing fee structure, of S$70,000 for each of the three Non-Executive Directors and a proposed supplemental fee of S$5,000 each
to Board members, amounting to a total of S$35,000, for serving on the following Board Committees namely, Audit Committee,
Risk Management Committee, Remuneration Committee and Nominating Committee. The Non-Executive Directors and members
(except for the respective Chairmen) of the Board Committees were previously not paid any fees for attendance at and contributions
to Board and Board Committee meetings.
2. The Ordinary Resolution 9 proposed in item no. 6 above, if passed, will renew the IPT Mandate for the Company, its subsidiaries
and associated companies that are considered “entities at risk” to enter in the ordinary course of business into certain types of
transactions with specified classes of the Interested Persons set out in the Addendum. Such resolution, if passed, will take effect from
the date of the above Meeting until the next Annual General Meeting (unless revoked or varied by the Company in general meeting).
The IPT Mandate, the renewal of which was approved by shareholders at the last Annual General Meeting of the Company held on
28 April 2011, will be expiring at the forthcoming Annual General Meeting. Information relating to the renewal of the IPT Mandate
can be found in the Addendum dated 3 April 2012 to the Company’s Annual Report 2011.
3. The Ordinary Resolution 10 proposed in item no. 7 above, if passed, will authorise the Directors of the Company from the date of the
above Meeting until the next Annual General Meeting to issue shares and convertible securities in the Company up to an amount
not exceeding 50% of the total number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares) in the capital of the Company, of which up to
20% may be issued other than on a pro rata basis to shareholders. The aggregate number of shares which may be issued shall be
based on the total number of issued shares at the time that Ordinary Resolution 10 is passed, after adjusting for new shares arising
from the conversion or exercise of any convertible securities or share options or vesting of share awards which are outstanding or
subsisting at the time that Ordinary Resolution 10 is passed, and any subsequent bonus issue or consolidation or subdivision of
shares. This authority will, unless revoked or varied at a general meeting, expire at the next Annual General Meeting of the Company.
4. The Ordinary Resolution 11 proposed in item no. 8 above, if passed, will empower the Directors of the Company from the date of
the above Meeting until the next Annual General Meeting to offer and grant options under the Wilmar ESOS 2009 and to issue and
allot shares pursuant to the exercise of such options under the aforesaid option scheme, provided that the aggregate number of
shares over which the committee may offer to grant options on any date, when added to the number of new shares issued and/or
issuable and/or existing shares transferred and/or transferable in respect of the options granted under the Wilmar ESOS 2009 and
in respect of all other share-based incentive schemes of the Company (including but not limited to the Wilmar Executives Share
Option Scheme 2000), if any, shall not exceed 15% of the total number of issued shares (excluding treasury shares) in the capital of
the Company from time to time. This authority will, unless revoked or varied at a general meeting, expire at the next Annual General
Meeting of the Company.
Notes:
1. A Member of the Company entitled to attend and vote at the Annual General Meeting is entitled to appoint one proxy or two
proxies to attend and vote in his stead, save that no such limit shall be imposed on the number of proxies appointed by members
which are nominee companies.
2. A proxy need not be a Member of the Company.
3. If the appointor is a corporation, the proxy form must be executed under seal or the hand of its attorney or officer duly authorised.
4. The instrument or form appointing a proxy, duly executed, must be deposited at the office of the Company’s registrar, Tricor
Barbinder Share Registration Services, at 80 Robinson Road, #02-00 Singapore 068898 not less than 48 hours before the time
appointed for the holding of the Annual General Meeting in order for the proxy to be entitled to attend and vote at the Annual
General Meeting.

proxy form Important :
1. For investors who have used their CPF monies to buy shares in WILMAR
INTERNATIONAL LIMITED, this Annual Report is forwarded to them at the
WILMAR INTERNATIONAL LIMITED request of their CPF Approved Nominees and is sent FOR INFORMATION ONLY.
(Incorporated in the Republic of Singapore) 2. This Proxy Form is not valid for use by CPF investors and shall be ineffective for
(Company Registration No. 199904785Z) all intents and purposes if used or purported to be used by them.
3. CPF investors who wish to vote should contact their CPF Approved Nominees.
I/We NRIC/Passport No./Company Registration No.
of (Address)
being a member/members of Wilmar International Limited (the “Company”), hereby appoint:

NRIC/ Proportion of
Name Address
Passport No. Shareholding (%)
and/or (please delete as appropriate)

NRIC/ Proportion of
Name Address
Passport No. Shareholding (%)
as my/our proxy/proxies to attend and to vote for me/us on my/our behalf and, if necessary, to demand a poll, at the Annual General
Meeting of the Company to be held at Jurong Room, Lobby Level, Shangri-La Hotel, 22 Orange Grove Road, Singapore 258350 on Friday,
27 April 2012 at 10.00 a.m. and at any adjournment thereof.
I/We direct my/our proxy/proxies to vote for or against the Ordinary Resolutions to be proposed at the Annual General Meeting as
indicated hereunder. If no specific directions as to voting are given, the proxy/proxies will vote or abstain from voting at his/their discretion.
No. Ordinary Resolutions To be used on To be used in

a show of hands the event of a poll
For* Against* For** Against**
1 To receive and adopt the Audited Accounts for the year ended 31
December 2011 and the Reports of the Directors and Auditors thereon.
2 To approve the payment of Proposed Final Dividend.
3 To approve the payment of Directors’ Fees.
4 To re-elect Mr Kuok Khoon Hong as a Director.
5 To re-elect Mr Leong Horn Kee as a Director.
6 To re-elect Mr Tay Kah Chye as a Director.
7 To re-appoint Mr Yeo Teng Yang as a Director.
8 To re-appoint Ernst & Young LLP as auditors and to authorise the Directors
to fix their remuneration.
9 To approve the renewal of IPT Mandate as described in the Addendum
dated 3 April 2012 to Annual Report 2011.
10 To authorise Directors to issue and allot shares in the Company.
11 To authorise Directors to offer and grant options under the Wilmar ESOS
2009 and to issue and allot shares in accordance with the provisions of
the Wilmar ESOS 2009.
* Please indicate your vote “For” or “Against” with a “X” within the box provided.
** If you wish to use all your votes “For” or “Against”, please indicate with an “X” within the box provided. Otherwise, please indicate number of votes “For” or “Against”
for each resolution within the box provided.
Dated this day of 2012

Total Number of Shares Held
CDP Register
Register of Members
Signature(s) of Member(s) or Common Seal
IMPORTANT – Please read notes overleaf

Notes:
1. A member of the Company entitled to attend and vote at the Annual General Meeting is entitled to appoint not more than two proxies to attend
and vote in his stead, save that no such limit shall be imposed on the number of proxies appointed by members which are nominee companies.
Such proxy need not be a member of the Company.
2. Where a member of the Company appoints two proxies, he shall specify the proportion of his shareholding (expressed as a percentage of the
whole) to be represented by each such proxy.
3. The instrument appointing a proxy or proxies must be under the hand of the appointor or his attorney duly authorised in writing. Where the
instrument appointing a proxy or proxies is executed by a corporation, it must be executed either under its common seal or under the hand of an
attorney or officer duly authorised.
4. A corporation which is a member of the Company may authorise by resolution of its directors or other governing body such person as it thinks
fit to act as its representative at the Annual General Meeting, in accordance with its Articles of Association and Section 179 of the Companies Act,
Chapter 50 of Singapore.
5. The instrument appointing a proxy or proxies, together with the power of attorney or other authority (if any) under which it is signed, or notarially
certified copy thereof, must be deposited at the office of the Company’s registrar, Tricor Barbinder Share Registration Services at 80 Robinson Road
#02-00 Singapore 068898 not less than 48 hours before the time set for the Annual General Meeting.
6. A member should insert the total number of shares held. If the member has shares entered against his name in the Depository Register (as defined
in Section 130A of the Companies Act, Chapter 50 of Singapore), he should insert that number of shares. If the member has shares registered in
his name in the Register of Members of the Company, he should insert that number of shares. If the member has shares entered against his name
in the Depository Register and shares registered in his name in the Register of Members of the Company, he should insert the aggregate number
of shares. If no number is inserted, this form of proxy will be deemed to relate to all the shares held by the member of the Company.
7. The Company shall be entitled to reject the instrument appointing a proxy or proxies if it is incomplete, improperly completed or illegible or where
the true intentions of the appointor are not ascertainable from the instructions of the appointor specified in the instrument appointing a proxy or
proxies. In addition, in the case of members of the Company whose shares are entered against their names in the Depository Register, the Com-
pany may reject any instrument appointing a proxy or proxies lodged if such members are not shown to have shares entered against their names
in the Depository Register 48 hours before the time appointed for holding the Annual General Meeting as certified by The Central Depository (Pte)
Limited to the Company.
8. A Depositor shall not be regarded as a member of the Company entitled to attend the Annual General Meeting and to speak and vote thereat
unless his name appears on the Depository Register 48 hours before the time set for the Annual General Meeting.
1st fold here
Affix
Postage
Stamp
WILMAR INTERNATIONAL LIMITED

c/o Tricor Barbinder Share Registration Services
80 Robinson Road #02-00
Singapore 068898
Fold this flap here to seal

Wilmar International Limited takes corporate citizenship seriously and we endeavour to do our part to protect the environment. PRINTER: This report is printed by an FSC certified printer.
PAPER: This report is fully printed on 100% recycled 9 Lives Offset paper which is uncoated and certified environmentally friendly. This paper is also carbon neutral, manufactured with a totally
chlorine free process (TCF) and has been granted the Singapore Environment Council Green Label certification. PRINTING: This report does not have finishings such as lamination and UV
coating, and is printed using soy-based ink which is more environmentally friendly as compared to traditional petroleum-based ink.
Co. Reg. No. 199904785Z
56 Neil Road, Singapore 088830

Tel : (65) 6216 0244
Fax : (65) 6836 1709
info@wilmar.com.sg
www.wilmar-international.com

Wilmar International Limited AR 2011 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wilmar International Limited AR 2011 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wilmar International Limited AR 2011 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Wilmar International Limited

Annual Report 2011

Wilmar International Limited, founded in 1991 and headquartered in Singapore, is

Wilmar’s portfolio of high quality processed agricultural products is the preferred

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 1

2 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

The Group continues to support education and Kuok Khoon Hong

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 3

• Over 300 manufacturing Ivory Coast Nigeria Vietnam Philippines

network covering China,

• Multinational workforce New Zealand

of over 90,000 people.

CASH FLOW (US$ million)

BALANCE SHEET (US$ million)

Net gearing (x) 0.97 0.90 0.41 0.25 0.52

PROFIT BEFORE TAX BY BUSINESS SEGMENT

6 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Return on average assets Return on average Equity

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 7

Kuok Khoon Hong MARTUA SITORUS TEO KIM YONG

KUOK KHOON CHEN KUOK KHOON EAN JOHN DANIEL RICE

8 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

TAY KAH CHYE KWAH THIAM HOCK

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 9

KUOK KHOON HONG KUOK KHOON CHEN

10 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 11

Name of Present Directorships Other Present Directorships/ Past directorships/

12 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 13

Mr Kuok Khoon Hong Mr Mu YanKui Mr Ho Kiam Kong

14 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Board of Directors Audit Committee Company

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 15

The Group views sustainability as an integral part of its

18 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 19

20 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Construction and commissioning of the full scale water

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 21

In India, Indonesia, Vietnam and Bangladesh, demand for branded

22 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 23

For more information on sustainability, please refer to the Corporate

24 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 25

26 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 27

28 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

The Group conducts research and development (R&D)

The Global R&D Centre based in Shanghai has at present 200

R&D activities in Indonesia include research into agronomic

Besides supporting the Group’s business and brands, the

Looking forward, the Group’s R&D activities will expand to

Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011 sustainable growth 29

CORPORATE AWARDS SUSTAINABILITY AWARDS

CHINA GROUP OPERATIONS

30 sustainable growth Wilmar International Limited • ANNUAL REPORT 2011

SUGAR Neptune • “Trust and Use” Certificate by Vietnam